diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_directory_v1.users.html b/docs/dyn/admin_directory_v1.users.html
index c7ea303..d362968 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_directory_v1.users.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_directory_v1.users.html
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@
   <code><a href="#insert">insert(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Creates a user.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
-  <code><a href="#list">list(customFieldMask=None, customer=None, domain=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, query=None, showDeleted=None, sortOrder=None, viewType=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+  <code><a href="#list">list(customFieldMask=None, customer=None, domain=None, event=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, query=None, showDeleted=None, sortOrder=None, viewType=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves a paginated list of either deleted users or all users in a domain.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
@@ -367,13 +367,21 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
-    <code class="details" id="list">list(customFieldMask=None, customer=None, domain=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, query=None, showDeleted=None, sortOrder=None, viewType=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(customFieldMask=None, customer=None, domain=None, event=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, projection=None, query=None, showDeleted=None, sortOrder=None, viewType=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Retrieves a paginated list of either deleted users or all users in a domain.
 
 Args:
   customFieldMask: string, A comma-separated list of schema names. All fields from these schemas are fetched. This should only be set when `projection=custom`.
   customer: string, The unique ID for the customer&#x27;s Google Workspace account. In case of a multi-domain account, to fetch all groups for a customer, fill this field instead of domain. You can also use the `my_customer` alias to represent your account&#x27;s `customerId`. The `customerId` is also returned as part of the [Users resource](/admin-sdk/directory/v1/reference/users). Either the `customer` or the `domain` parameter must be provided.
   domain: string, The domain name. Use this field to get fields from only one domain. To return all domains for a customer account, use the `customer` query parameter instead. Either the `customer` or the `domain` parameter must be provided.
+  event: string, Event on which subscription is intended (if subscribing)
+    Allowed values
+      eventUndefined - 
+      add - User Created Event
+      delete - User Deleted Event
+      makeAdmin - User Admin Status Change Event
+      undelete - User Undeleted Event
+      update - User Updated Event
   maxResults: integer, Maximum number of results to return.
   orderBy: string, Property to use for sorting results.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
index f840e84..f386342 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
@@ -97,15 +97,15 @@
   <pre>Retrieves a list of activities for a specific customer&#x27;s account and application such as the Admin console application or the Google Drive application. For more information, see the guides for administrator and Google Drive activity reports. For more information about the activity report&#x27;s parameters, see the activity parameters reference guides. 
 
 Args:
-  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique G Suite profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
+  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique Google Workspace profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
   applicationName: string, Application name for which the events are to be retrieved. (required)
     Allowed values
       application_name_undefined - 
-      access_transparency - The G Suite Access Transparency activity reports return information about different types of Access Transparency activity events.
+      access_transparency - The Google Workspace Access Transparency activity reports return information about different types of Access Transparency activity events.
       admin - The Admin console application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of administrator activity events.
-      calendar - The G Suite Calendar application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Calendar activity events.
+      calendar - The Google Calendar application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Calendar activity events.
       chat - The Chat activity reports return information about various Chat activity events.
-      drive - The Google Drive application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Drive activity events. The Drive activity report is only available for G Suite Business customers.
+      drive - The Google Drive application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Drive activity events. The Drive activity report is only available for Google Workspace Business and Enterprise customers.
       gcp - The Google Cloud Platform application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various GCP activity events.
       gplus - The Google+ application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google+ activity events.
       groups - The Google Groups application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Groups activity events.
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
   actorIpAddress: string, The Internet Protocol (IP) Address of host where the event was performed. This is an additional way to filter a report&#x27;s summary using the IP address of the user whose activity is being reported. This IP address may or may not reflect the user&#x27;s physical location. For example, the IP address can be the user&#x27;s proxy server&#x27;s address or a virtual private network (VPN) address. This parameter supports both IPv4 and IPv6 address versions.
   customerId: string, The unique ID of the customer to retrieve data for.
   endTime: string, Sets the end of the range of time shown in the report. The date is in the RFC 3339 format, for example 2010-10-28T10:26:35.000Z. The default value is the approximate time of the API request. An API report has three basic time concepts: - *Date of the API&#x27;s request for a report*: When the API created and retrieved the report. - *Report&#x27;s start time*: The beginning of the timespan shown in the report. The `startTime` must be before the `endTime` (if specified) and the current time when the request is made, or the API returns an error. - *Report&#x27;s end time*: The end of the timespan shown in the report. For example, the timespan of events summarized in a report can start in April and end in May. The report itself can be requested in August. If the `endTime` is not specified, the report returns all activities from the `startTime` until the current time or the most recent 180 days if the `startTime` is more than 180 days in the past.
-  eventName: string, The name of the event being queried by the API. Each `eventName` is related to a specific G Suite service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. An example is the Google Calendar events in the Admin console application&#x27;s reports. The Calendar Settings `type` structure has all of the Calendar `eventName` activities reported by the API. When an administrator changes a Calendar setting, the API reports this activity in the Calendar Settings `type` and `eventName` parameters. For more information about `eventName` query strings and parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
+  eventName: string, The name of the event being queried by the API. Each `eventName` is related to a specific Google Workspace service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. An example is the Google Calendar events in the Admin console application&#x27;s reports. The Calendar Settings `type` structure has all of the Calendar `eventName` activities reported by the API. When an administrator changes a Calendar setting, the API reports this activity in the Calendar Settings `type` and `eventName` parameters. For more information about `eventName` query strings and parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
   filters: string, The `filters` query string is a comma-separated list. The list is composed of event parameters that are manipulated by relational operators. Event parameters are in the form `parameter1 name[parameter1 value],parameter2 name[parameter2 value],...` These event parameters are associated with a specific `eventName`. An empty report is returned if the filtered request&#x27;s parameter does not belong to the `eventName`. For more information about `eventName` parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`. In the following Admin Activity example, the &lt;&gt; operator is URL-encoded in the request&#x27;s query string (%3C%3E): GET...&amp;eventName=CHANGE_CALENDAR_SETTING &amp;filters=NEW_VALUE%3C%3EREAD_ONLY_ACCESS In the following Drive example, the list can be a view or edit event&#x27;s `doc_id` parameter with a value that is manipulated by an &#x27;equal to&#x27; (==) or &#x27;not equal to&#x27; (&lt;&gt;) relational operator. In the first example, the report returns each edited document&#x27;s `doc_id`. In the second example, the report returns each viewed document&#x27;s `doc_id` that equals the value 12345 and does not return any viewed document&#x27;s which have a `doc_id` value of 98765. The &lt;&gt; operator is URL-encoded in the request&#x27;s query string (%3C%3E): GET...&amp;eventName=edit&amp;filters=doc_id GET...&amp;eventName=view&amp;filters=doc_id==12345,doc_id%3C%3E98765 The relational operators include: - `==` - &#x27;equal to&#x27;. - `&lt;&gt;` - &#x27;not equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C%3E). - `&lt;` - &#x27;less than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C). - `&lt;=` - &#x27;less than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C=). - `&gt;` - &#x27;greater than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E). - `&gt;=` - &#x27;greater than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E=). *Note:* The API doesn&#x27;t accept multiple values of a parameter. If a particular parameter is supplied more than once in the API request, the API only accepts the last value of that request parameter. In addition, if an invalid request parameter is supplied in the API request, the API ignores that request parameter and returns the response corresponding to the remaining valid request parameters. If no parameters are requested, all parameters are returned. 
   groupIdFilter: string, Comma separated group ids (obfuscated) on which user activities are filtered, i.e, the response will contain activities for only those users that are a part of at least one of the group ids mentioned here. Format: &quot;id:abc123,id:xyz456&quot;
   maxResults: integer, Determines how many activity records are shown on each response page. For example, if the request sets `maxResults=1` and the report has two activities, the report has two pages. The response&#x27;s `nextPageToken` property has the token to the second page. The `maxResults` query string is optional in the request. The default value is 1000.
@@ -147,12 +147,12 @@
         &quot;callerType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of actor.
         &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The primary email address of the actor. May be absent if there is no email address associated with the actor.
         &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Only present when `callerType` is `KEY`. Can be the `consumer_key` of the requestor for OAuth 2LO API requests or an identifier for robot accounts.
-        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique G Suite profile ID of the actor. May be absent if the actor is not a G Suite user.
+        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique Google Workspace profile ID of the actor. May be absent if the actor is not a Google Workspace user.
       },
       &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ETag of the entry.
       &quot;events&quot;: [ # Activity events in the report.
         {
-          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the event. This is the specific name of the activity reported by the API. And each `eventName` is related to a specific G Suite service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. For `eventName` request parameters in general: - If no `eventName` is given, the report returns all possible instances of an `eventName`. - When you request an `eventName`, the API&#x27;s response returns all activities which contain that `eventName`. It is possible that the returned activities will have other `eventName` properties in addition to the one requested. For more information about `eventName` properties, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the event. This is the specific name of the activity reported by the API. And each `eventName` is related to a specific Google Workspace service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. For `eventName` request parameters in general: - If no `eventName` is given, the report returns all possible instances of an `eventName`. - When you request an `eventName`, the API&#x27;s response returns all activities which contain that `eventName`. It is possible that the returned activities will have other `eventName` properties in addition to the one requested. For more information about `eventName` properties, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
           &quot;parameters&quot;: [ # Parameter value pairs for various applications. For more information about `eventName` parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
             {
               &quot;boolValue&quot;: True or False, # Boolean value of the parameter.
@@ -207,16 +207,16 @@
               &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String value of the parameter.
             },
           ],
-          &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of event. The G Suite service or feature that an administrator changes is identified in the `type` property which identifies an event using the `eventName` property. For a full list of the API&#x27;s `type` categories, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
+          &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Type of event. The Google Workspace service or feature that an administrator changes is identified in the `type` property which identifies an event using the `eventName` property. For a full list of the API&#x27;s `type` categories, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
         },
       ],
       &quot;id&quot;: { # Unique identifier for each activity record.
         &quot;applicationName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Application name to which the event belongs. For possible values see the list of applications above in `applicationName`.
-        &quot;customerId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a G suite account.
+        &quot;customerId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a Google Workspace account.
         &quot;time&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Time of occurrence of the activity. This is in UNIX epoch time in seconds.
         &quot;uniqueQualifier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique qualifier if multiple events have the same time.
       },
-      &quot;ipAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # IP address of the user doing the action. This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the user when logging into G Suite which may or may not reflect the user&#x27;s physical location. For example, the IP address can be the user&#x27;s proxy server&#x27;s address or a virtual private network (VPN) address. The API supports IPv4 and IPv6.
+      &quot;ipAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # IP address of the user doing the action. This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the user when logging into Google Workspace, which may or may not reflect the user&#x27;s physical location. For example, the IP address can be the user&#x27;s proxy server&#x27;s address or a virtual private network (VPN) address. The API supports IPv4 and IPv6.
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;admin#reports#activity&quot;, # The type of API resource. For an activity report, the value is `audit#activity`.
       &quot;ownerDomain&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is the domain that is affected by the report&#x27;s event. For example domain of Admin console or the Drive application&#x27;s document owner.
     },
@@ -245,15 +245,15 @@
   <pre>Start receiving notifications for account activities. For more information, see Receiving Push Notifications.
 
 Args:
-  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique G Suite profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
+  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique Google Workspace profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
   applicationName: string, Application name for which the events are to be retrieved. (required)
     Allowed values
       application_name_unspecified - 
-      access_transparency - The G Suite Access Transparency activity reports return information about different types of Access Transparency activity events.
+      access_transparency - The Google Workspace Access Transparency activity reports return information about different types of Access Transparency activity events.
       admin - The Admin console application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of administrator activity events.
-      calendar - The G Suite Calendar application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Calendar activity events.
+      calendar - The Google Calendar application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Calendar activity events.
       chat - The Chat activity reports return information about various Chat activity events.
-      drive - The Google Drive application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Drive activity events. The Drive activity report is only available for G Suite Business customers.
+      drive - The Google Drive application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Drive activity events. The Drive activity report is only available for Google Workspace Business and Google Workspace Enterprise customers.
       gcp - The Google Cloud Platform application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various GCP activity events.
       gplus - The Google+ application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google+ activity events.
       groups - The Google Groups application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Groups activity events.
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@
   actorIpAddress: string, The Internet Protocol (IP) Address of host where the event was performed. This is an additional way to filter a report&#x27;s summary using the IP address of the user whose activity is being reported. This IP address may or may not reflect the user&#x27;s physical location. For example, the IP address can be the user&#x27;s proxy server&#x27;s address or a virtual private network (VPN) address. This parameter supports both IPv4 and IPv6 address versions.
   customerId: string, The unique ID of the customer to retrieve data for.
   endTime: string, Sets the end of the range of time shown in the report. The date is in the RFC 3339 format, for example 2010-10-28T10:26:35.000Z. The default value is the approximate time of the API request. An API report has three basic time concepts: - *Date of the API&#x27;s request for a report*: When the API created and retrieved the report. - *Report&#x27;s start time*: The beginning of the timespan shown in the report. The `startTime` must be before the `endTime` (if specified) and the current time when the request is made, or the API returns an error. - *Report&#x27;s end time*: The end of the timespan shown in the report. For example, the timespan of events summarized in a report can start in April and end in May. The report itself can be requested in August. If the `endTime` is not specified, the report returns all activities from the `startTime` until the current time or the most recent 180 days if the `startTime` is more than 180 days in the past.
-  eventName: string, The name of the event being queried by the API. Each `eventName` is related to a specific G Suite service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. An example is the Google Calendar events in the Admin console application&#x27;s reports. The Calendar Settings `type` structure has all of the Calendar `eventName` activities reported by the API. When an administrator changes a Calendar setting, the API reports this activity in the Calendar Settings `type` and `eventName` parameters. For more information about `eventName` query strings and parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
+  eventName: string, The name of the event being queried by the API. Each `eventName` is related to a specific Google Workspace service or feature which the API organizes into types of events. An example is the Google Calendar events in the Admin console application&#x27;s reports. The Calendar Settings `type` structure has all of the Calendar `eventName` activities reported by the API. When an administrator changes a Calendar setting, the API reports this activity in the Calendar Settings `type` and `eventName` parameters. For more information about `eventName` query strings and parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`.
   filters: string, The `filters` query string is a comma-separated list. The list is composed of event parameters that are manipulated by relational operators. Event parameters are in the form `parameter1 name[parameter1 value],parameter2 name[parameter2 value],...` These event parameters are associated with a specific `eventName`. An empty report is returned if the filtered request&#x27;s parameter does not belong to the `eventName`. For more information about `eventName` parameters, see the list of event names for various applications above in `applicationName`. In the following Admin Activity example, the &lt;&gt; operator is URL-encoded in the request&#x27;s query string (%3C%3E): GET...&amp;eventName=CHANGE_CALENDAR_SETTING &amp;filters=NEW_VALUE%3C%3EREAD_ONLY_ACCESS In the following Drive example, the list can be a view or edit event&#x27;s `doc_id` parameter with a value that is manipulated by an &#x27;equal to&#x27; (==) or &#x27;not equal to&#x27; (&lt;&gt;) relational operator. In the first example, the report returns each edited document&#x27;s `doc_id`. In the second example, the report returns each viewed document&#x27;s `doc_id` that equals the value 12345 and does not return any viewed document&#x27;s which have a `doc_id` value of 98765. The &lt;&gt; operator is URL-encoded in the request&#x27;s query string (%3C%3E): GET...&amp;eventName=edit&amp;filters=doc_id GET...&amp;eventName=view&amp;filters=doc_id==12345,doc_id%3C%3E98765 The relational operators include: - `==` - &#x27;equal to&#x27;. - `&lt;&gt;` - &#x27;not equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C%3E). - `&lt;` - &#x27;less than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C). - `&lt;=` - &#x27;less than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C=). - `&gt;` - &#x27;greater than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E). - `&gt;=` - &#x27;greater than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E=). *Note:* The API doesn&#x27;t accept multiple values of a parameter. If a particular parameter is supplied more than once in the API request, the API only accepts the last value of that request parameter. In addition, if an invalid request parameter is supplied in the API request, the API ignores that request parameter and returns the response corresponding to the remaining valid request parameters. If no parameters are requested, all parameters are returned. 
   groupIdFilter: string, Comma separated group ids (obfuscated) on which user activities are filtered, i.e, the response will contain activities for only those users that are a part of at least one of the group ids mentioned here. Format: &quot;id:abc123,id:xyz456&quot;
   maxResults: integer, Determines how many activity records are shown on each response page. For example, if the request sets `maxResults=1` and the report has two activities, the report has two pages. The response&#x27;s `nextPageToken` property has the token to the second page. The `maxResults` query string is optional in the request. The default value is 1000.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.customerUsageReports.html b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.customerUsageReports.html
index aaf900e..afa61cd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.customerUsageReports.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.customerUsageReports.html
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@
       &quot;entity&quot;: { # Output only. Information about the type of the item.
         &quot;customerId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier of the customer&#x27;s account.
         &quot;entityId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Object key. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;OBJECT&quot; Note: external-facing name of report is &quot;Entities&quot; rather than &quot;Objects&quot;.
-        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable G Suite profile identifier.
+        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable Google Workspace profile identifier.
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The type of item. The value is `user`.
         &quot;userEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s email address. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;USER&quot;
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.entityUsageReports.html b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.entityUsageReports.html
index 864ad02..7a8e6ed 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.entityUsageReports.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.entityUsageReports.html
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
       &quot;entity&quot;: { # Output only. Information about the type of the item.
         &quot;customerId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier of the customer&#x27;s account.
         &quot;entityId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Object key. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;OBJECT&quot; Note: external-facing name of report is &quot;Entities&quot; rather than &quot;Objects&quot;.
-        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable G Suite profile identifier.
+        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable Google Workspace profile identifier.
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The type of item. The value is `user`.
         &quot;userEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s email address. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;USER&quot;
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.userUsageReport.html b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.userUsageReport.html
index 12b6463..4d5339c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.userUsageReport.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.userUsageReport.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
   <pre>Retrieves a report which is a collection of properties and statistics for a set of users with the account. For more information, see the User Usage Report guide. For more information about the user report&#x27;s parameters, see the Users Usage parameters reference guides.
 
 Args:
-  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique G Suite profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
+  userKey: string, Represents the profile ID or the user email for which the data should be filtered. Can be `all` for all information, or `userKey` for a user&#x27;s unique Google Workspace profile ID or their primary email address. (required)
   date: string, Represents the date the usage occurred. The timestamp is in the ISO 8601 format, yyyy-mm-dd. We recommend you use your account&#x27;s time zone for this. (required)
   customerId: string, The unique ID of the customer to retrieve data for.
   filters: string, The `filters` query string is a comma-separated list of an application&#x27;s event parameters where the parameter&#x27;s value is manipulated by a relational operator. The `filters` query string includes the name of the application whose usage is returned in the report. The application values for the Users Usage Report include `accounts`, `docs`, and `gmail`. Filters are in the form `[application name]:parameter name[parameter value],...`. In this example, the `&lt;&gt;` &#x27;not equal to&#x27; operator is URL-encoded in the request&#x27;s query string (%3C%3E): GET https://www.googleapis.com/admin/reports/v1/usage/users/all/dates/2013-03-03 ?parameters=accounts:last_login_time &amp;filters=accounts:last_login_time%3C%3E2010-10-28T10:26:35.000Z The relational operators include: - `==` - &#x27;equal to&#x27;. - `&lt;&gt;` - &#x27;not equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C%3E). - `&lt;` - &#x27;less than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C). - `&lt;=` - &#x27;less than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3C=). - `&gt;` - &#x27;greater than&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E). - `&gt;=` - &#x27;greater than or equal to&#x27;. It is URL-encoded (%3E=). 
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
       &quot;entity&quot;: { # Output only. Information about the type of the item.
         &quot;customerId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier of the customer&#x27;s account.
         &quot;entityId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Object key. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;OBJECT&quot; Note: external-facing name of report is &quot;Entities&quot; rather than &quot;Objects&quot;.
-        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable G Suite profile identifier.
+        &quot;profileId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s immutable Google Workspace profile identifier.
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The type of item. The value is `user`.
         &quot;userEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The user&#x27;s email address. Only relevant if entity.type = &quot;USER&quot;
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admob_v1.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/admob_v1.accounts.html
index c2c941f..15a7a1c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admob_v1.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admob_v1.accounts.html
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Gets information about the specified AdMob publisher account.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Lists the AdMob publisher account accessible with the client credential. Currently, all credentials have access to at most one AdMob account.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists the AdMob publisher account that was most recently signed in to from the AdMob UI. For more information, see https://support.google.com/admob/answer/10243672.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="list">list(pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Lists the AdMob publisher account accessible with the client credential. Currently, all credentials have access to at most one AdMob account.
+  <pre>Lists the AdMob publisher account that was most recently signed in to from the AdMob UI. For more information, see https://support.google.com/admob/answer/10243672.
 
 Args:
   pageSize: integer, Maximum number of accounts to return.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.adUnits.html b/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.adUnits.html
index 354a93e..3758fbf 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.adUnits.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.adUnits.html
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Resource name of the account to list ad units for. Example: accounts/pub-9876543210987654 (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of ad units to return.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of ad units to return. If unspecified or 0, at most 1000 ad units will be returned. The maximum value is 10,000; values above 10,000 will be coerced to 10,000.
   pageToken: string, The value returned by the last `ListAdUnitsResponse`; indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListAdUnits` call, and that the system should return the next page of data.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
diff --git a/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.html
index b4e8a53..8425ede 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admob_v1beta.accounts.html
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Gets information about the specified AdMob publisher account.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Lists the AdMob publisher account accessible with the client credential. Currently, all credentials have access to at most one AdMob account.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists the AdMob publisher account that was most recently signed in to from the AdMob UI. For more information, see https://support.google.com/admob/answer/10243672.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="list">list(pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Lists the AdMob publisher account accessible with the client credential. Currently, all credentials have access to at most one AdMob account.
+  <pre>Lists the AdMob publisher account that was most recently signed in to from the AdMob UI. For more information, see https://support.google.com/admob/answer/10243672.
 
 Args:
   pageSize: integer, Maximum number of accounts to return.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html b/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
index 8c44dc7..4228073 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/androidenterprise_v1.devices.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Sets whether a device's access to Google services is enabled or disabled. The device state takes effect only if enforcing EMM policies on Android devices is enabled in the Google Admin Console. Otherwise, the device state is ignored and all devices are allowed access to Google services. This is only supported for Google-managed users.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#update">update(enterpriseId, userId, deviceId, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates the device policy</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the device policy. To ensure the policy is properly enforced, you need to prevent unmanaged accounts from accessing Google Play by setting the allowed_accounts in the managed configuration for the Google Play package. See restrict accounts in Google Play.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="update">update(enterpriseId, userId, deviceId, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates the device policy
+  <pre>Updates the device policy. To ensure the policy is properly enforced, you need to prevent unmanaged accounts from accessing Google Play by setting the allowed_accounts in the managed configuration for the Google Play package. See restrict accounts in Google Play.
 
 Args:
   enterpriseId: string, The ID of the enterprise. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.html
index 0221a91..de5c380 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.html
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@
       &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
         &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
       &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
       &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
       &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a data transfer configuration. All fields must be set, even if they are not updated.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id. (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.runs.html b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.runs.html
index 634a875..4f34a00 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.runs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.locations.transferConfigs.runs.html
@@ -177,12 +177,12 @@
       LATEST - Only latest run per day should be returned.
   states: string, When specified, only transfer runs with requested states are returned. (repeated)
     Allowed values
-      TRANSFER_STATE_UNSPECIFIED - State placeholder.
-      PENDING - Data transfer is scheduled and is waiting to be picked up by data transfer backend.
-      RUNNING - Data transfer is in progress.
-      SUCCEEDED - Data transfer completed successfully.
-      FAILED - Data transfer failed.
-      CANCELLED - Data transfer is cancelled.
+      TRANSFER_STATE_UNSPECIFIED - State placeholder (0).
+      PENDING - Data transfer is scheduled and is waiting to be picked up by data transfer backend (2).
+      RUNNING - Data transfer is in progress (3).
+      SUCCEEDED - Data transfer completed successfully (4).
+      FAILED - Data transfer failed (5).
+      CANCELLED - Data transfer is cancelled (6).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.html
index a6760c7..cd913b6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.html
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@
       &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
         &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
       &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
       &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
       &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a data transfer configuration. All fields must be set, even if they are not updated.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id. (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@
   &quot;emailPreferences&quot;: { # Represents preferences for sending email notifications for transfer run events. # Email notifications will be sent according to these preferences to the email address of the user who owns this transfer config.
     &quot;enableFailureEmail&quot;: True or False, # If true, email notifications will be sent on transfer run failures.
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. The name is automatically generated based on the config_id specified in CreateTransferConfigRequest along with project_id and region. If config_id is not provided, usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required, will be generated for config_id.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the transfer config. Transfer config names have the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{region}/transferConfigs/{config_id}`. Where `config_id` is usually a uuid, even though it is not guaranteed or required. The name is ignored when creating a transfer config.
   &quot;nextRunTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Next time when data transfer will run.
   &quot;notificationPubsubTopic&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Pub/Sub topic where notifications will be sent after transfer runs associated with this transfer config finish.
   &quot;params&quot;: { # Data transfer specific parameters.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.runs.html b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.runs.html
index 2fb95a7..2c7a472 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.runs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquerydatatransfer_v1.projects.transferConfigs.runs.html
@@ -177,12 +177,12 @@
       LATEST - Only latest run per day should be returned.
   states: string, When specified, only transfer runs with requested states are returned. (repeated)
     Allowed values
-      TRANSFER_STATE_UNSPECIFIED - State placeholder.
-      PENDING - Data transfer is scheduled and is waiting to be picked up by data transfer backend.
-      RUNNING - Data transfer is in progress.
-      SUCCEEDED - Data transfer completed successfully.
-      FAILED - Data transfer failed.
-      CANCELLED - Data transfer is cancelled.
+      TRANSFER_STATE_UNSPECIFIED - State placeholder (0).
+      PENDING - Data transfer is scheduled and is waiting to be picked up by data transfer backend (2).
+      RUNNING - Data transfer is in progress (3).
+      SUCCEEDED - Data transfer completed successfully (4).
+      FAILED - Data transfer failed (5).
+      CANCELLED - Data transfer is cancelled (6).
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
index 71783e5..9d03a37 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@
       &quot;writeDisposition&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Specifies the action that occurs if the destination table or partition already exists. The following values are supported: * WRITE_TRUNCATE: If the table or partition already exists, BigQuery overwrites the entire table or all the partitions data. * WRITE_APPEND: If the table or partition already exists, BigQuery appends the data to the table or the latest partition. * WRITE_EMPTY: If the table already exists and contains data, an error is returned. The default value is WRITE_APPEND. Each action is atomic and only occurs if BigQuery is able to complete the job successfully. Details are at https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/loading-data-local#appending_to_or_overwriting_a_table_using_a_local_file.
     },
     &quot;gcsDestination&quot;: { # A Cloud Storage location. # Destination on Cloud Storage.
-      &quot;uri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The uri of the Cloud Storage object. It&#x27;s the same uri that is used by gsutil. For example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name&quot;. See [Quickstart: Using the gsutil tool] (https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/quickstart-gsutil) for examples.
+      &quot;uri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The uri of the Cloud Storage object. It&#x27;s the same uri that is used by gsutil. Example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name&quot;. See [Viewing and Editing Object Metadata](https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/viewing-editing-metadata) for more information. If the specified Cloud Storage object already exists and there is no [hold](https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/object-holds), it will be overwritten with the analysis result.
     },
   },
 }
@@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The BigQuery table to which the snapshot result should be written. If this table does not exist, a new table with the given name will be created.
     },
     &quot;gcsDestination&quot;: { # A Cloud Storage location. # Destination on Cloud Storage.
-      &quot;uri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The uri of the Cloud Storage object. It&#x27;s the same uri that is used by gsutil. Example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name&quot;. See [Viewing and Editing Object Metadata](https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/viewing-editing-metadata) for more information.
+      &quot;uri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The uri of the Cloud Storage object. It&#x27;s the same uri that is used by gsutil. Example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name&quot;. See [Viewing and Editing Object Metadata](https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/viewing-editing-metadata) for more information. If the specified Cloud Storage object already exists and there is no [hold](https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/object-holds), it will be overwritten with the exported result.
       &quot;uriPrefix&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The uri prefix of all generated Cloud Storage objects. Example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name_prefix&quot;. Each object uri is in format: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name_prefix// and only contains assets for that type. starts from 0. Example: &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name_prefix/compute.googleapis.com/Disk/0&quot; is the first shard of output objects containing all compute.googleapis.com/Disk assets. An INVALID_ARGUMENT error will be returned if file with the same name &quot;gs://bucket_name/object_name_prefix&quot; already exists.
     },
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.events.html b/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.events.html
index 6495b23..7771c2a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.events.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.events.html
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#report">report(projectName, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Report an individual error event. This endpoint accepts **either** an OAuth token, **or** an [API key](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158862) for authentication. To use an API key, append it to the URL as the value of a `key` parameter. For example: `POST https://clouderrorreporting.googleapis.com/v1beta1/{projectName}/events:report?key=123ABC456`</p>
+<p class="firstline">Report an individual error event and record the event to a log. This endpoint accepts **either** an OAuth token, **or** an [API key](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158862) for authentication. To use an API key, append it to the URL as the value of a `key` parameter. For example: `POST https://clouderrorreporting.googleapis.com/v1beta1/{projectName}/events:report?key=123ABC456` **Note:** [Error Reporting](/error-reporting) is a global service built on Cloud Logging and doesn't analyze logs stored in regional log buckets or logs routed to other Google Cloud projects. For more information, see [Using Error Reporting with regionalized logs](/error-reporting/docs/regionalization).</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="report">report(projectName, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Report an individual error event. This endpoint accepts **either** an OAuth token, **or** an [API key](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158862) for authentication. To use an API key, append it to the URL as the value of a `key` parameter. For example: `POST https://clouderrorreporting.googleapis.com/v1beta1/{projectName}/events:report?key=123ABC456`
+  <pre>Report an individual error event and record the event to a log. This endpoint accepts **either** an OAuth token, **or** an [API key](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158862) for authentication. To use an API key, append it to the URL as the value of a `key` parameter. For example: `POST https://clouderrorreporting.googleapis.com/v1beta1/{projectName}/events:report?key=123ABC456` **Note:** [Error Reporting](/error-reporting) is a global service built on Cloud Logging and doesn&#x27;t analyze logs stored in regional log buckets or logs routed to other Google Cloud projects. For more information, see [Using Error Reporting with regionalized logs](/error-reporting/docs/regionalization).
 
 Args:
   projectName: string, Required. The resource name of the Google Cloud Platform project. Written as `projects/{projectId}`, where `{projectId}` is the [Google Cloud Platform project ID](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158840). Example: // `projects/my-project-123`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.groupStats.html b/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.groupStats.html
index 715ed19..e7a9bc7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.groupStats.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/clouderrorreporting_v1beta1.projects.groupStats.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
   <pre>Lists the specified groups.
 
 Args:
-  projectName: string, Required. The resource name of the Google Cloud Platform project. Written as `projects/{projectID}`, where `{projectID}` is the [Google Cloud Platform project ID](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158840). Example: `projects/my-project-123`. (required)
+  projectName: string, Required. The resource name of the Google Cloud Platform project. Written as `projects/{projectID}` or `projects/{projectNumber}`, where `{projectID}` and `{projectNumber}` can be found in the [Google Cloud Console](https://support.google.com/cloud/answer/6158840). Examples: `projects/my-project-123`, `projects/5551234`. (required)
   alignment: string, Optional. The alignment of the timed counts to be returned. Default is `ALIGNMENT_EQUAL_AT_END`.
     Allowed values
       ERROR_COUNT_ALIGNMENT_UNSPECIFIED - No alignment specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.devices.html b/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.devices.html
index b011cef..fc3d017 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.devices.html
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the device. For example, `projects/p0/locations/us-central1/registries/registry0/devices/device0` or `projects/p0/locations/us-central1/registries/registry0/devices/{num_id}`. (required)
-  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. If the field mask is unset or empty, all fields are returned.
+  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. If the field mask is unset or empty, all fields are returned. Fields have to be provided in snake_case format, for example: `last_heartbeat_time`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@
   parent: string, Required. The device registry path. Required. For example, `projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/registries/my-registry`. (required)
   deviceIds: string, A list of device string IDs. For example, `[&#x27;device0&#x27;, &#x27;device12&#x27;]`. If empty, this field is ignored. Maximum IDs: 10,000 (repeated)
   deviceNumIds: string, A list of device numeric IDs. If empty, this field is ignored. Maximum IDs: 10,000. (repeated)
-  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. The fields `id` and `num_id` are always returned, along with any other fields specified.
+  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. The fields `id` and `num_id` are always returned, along with any other fields specified in snake_case format, for example: `last_heartbeat_time`.
   gatewayListOptions_associationsDeviceId: string, If set, returns only the gateways with which the specified device is associated. The device ID can be numeric (`num_id`) or the user-defined string (`id`). For example, if `456` is specified, returns only the gateways to which the device with `num_id` 456 is bound.
   gatewayListOptions_associationsGatewayId: string, If set, only devices associated with the specified gateway are returned. The gateway ID can be numeric (`num_id`) or the user-defined string (`id`). For example, if `123` is specified, only devices bound to the gateway with `num_id` 123 are returned.
   gatewayListOptions_gatewayType: string, If `GATEWAY` is specified, only gateways are returned. If `NON_GATEWAY` is specified, only non-gateway devices are returned. If `GATEWAY_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED` is specified, all devices are returned.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.groups.devices.html b/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.groups.devices.html
index cbd04c2..9970d7f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.groups.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudiot_v1.projects.locations.registries.groups.devices.html
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@
   parent: string, Required. The device registry path. Required. For example, `projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/registries/my-registry`. (required)
   deviceIds: string, A list of device string IDs. For example, `[&#x27;device0&#x27;, &#x27;device12&#x27;]`. If empty, this field is ignored. Maximum IDs: 10,000 (repeated)
   deviceNumIds: string, A list of device numeric IDs. If empty, this field is ignored. Maximum IDs: 10,000. (repeated)
-  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. The fields `id` and `num_id` are always returned, along with any other fields specified.
+  fieldMask: string, The fields of the `Device` resource to be returned in the response. The fields `id` and `num_id` are always returned, along with any other fields specified in snake_case format, for example: `last_heartbeat_time`.
   gatewayListOptions_associationsDeviceId: string, If set, returns only the gateways with which the specified device is associated. The device ID can be numeric (`num_id`) or the user-defined string (`id`). For example, if `456` is specified, returns only the gateways to which the device with `num_id` 456 is bound.
   gatewayListOptions_associationsGatewayId: string, If set, only devices associated with the specified gateway are returned. The gateway ID can be numeric (`num_id`) or the user-defined string (`id`). For example, if `123` is specified, only devices bound to the gateway with `num_id` 123 are returned.
   gatewayListOptions_gatewayType: string, If `GATEWAY` is specified, only gateways are returned. If `NON_GATEWAY` is specified, only non-gateway devices are returned. If `GATEWAY_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED` is specified, all devices are returned.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudsearch_v1.query.html b/docs/dyn/cloudsearch_v1.query.html
index 64d075d..a089fde 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudsearch_v1.query.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudsearch_v1.query.html
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request of suggest API.
-  &quot;dataSourceRestrictions&quot;: [ # The sources to use for suggestions. If not specified, the data sources are taken from the current search application. NOTE: Suggestions are supported only for third party data sources and people (i.e. PredefinedSource.PERSON).
+  &quot;dataSourceRestrictions&quot;: [ # The sources to use for suggestions. If not specified, the data sources are taken from the current search application. NOTE: Suggestions are only supported for the following sources: * Third-party data sources * PredefinedSource.PERSON * PredefinedSource.GOOGLE_DRIVE
     { # Restriction on Datasource.
       &quot;filterOptions&quot;: [ # Filter options restricting the results. If multiple filters are present, they are grouped by object type before joining. Filters with the same object type are joined conjunctively, then the resulting expressions are joined disjunctively. The maximum number of elements is 20. NOTE: Suggest API supports only few filters at the moment: &quot;objecttype&quot;, &quot;type&quot; and &quot;mimetype&quot;. For now, schema specific filters cannot be used to filter suggestions.
         { # Filter options to be applied on query.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudshell_v1.users.environments.html b/docs/dyn/cloudshell_v1.users.environments.html
index 2148fa6..748629c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudshell_v1.users.environments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudshell_v1.users.environments.html
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for AddPublicKey.
-  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key that should be added to the environment. Supported formats are `ssh-dss` (see RFC4253), `ssh-rsa` (see RFC4253), `ecdsa-sha2-nistp256` (see RFC5656), `ecdsa-sha2-nistp384` (see RFC5656) and `ecdsa-sha2-nistp521` (see RFC5656). It should be structured as , where part is encoded with Base64.
+  &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Key that should be added to the environment. Supported formats are `ssh-dss` (see RFC4253), `ssh-rsa` (see RFC4253), `ecdsa-sha2-nistp256` (see RFC5656), `ecdsa-sha2-nistp384` (see RFC5656) and `ecdsa-sha2-nistp521` (see RFC5656). It should be structured as &lt;format&gt; &lt;content&gt;, where &lt;content&gt; part is encoded with Base64.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
index de1bccc..19b8af5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
@@ -613,6 +613,11 @@
           &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
         },
         &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+        &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+          &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+          &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+          &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+        },
         &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
         &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
         &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -1216,6 +1221,11 @@
         &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+      &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+        &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+        &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+        &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+      },
       &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -1722,6 +1732,11 @@
             &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
           },
           &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+          &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+            &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+            &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+            &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+          },
           &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
           &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
           &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
index 0381560..93b0b73 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.nodePools.html
@@ -223,6 +223,11 @@
       &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
     },
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+    &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+      &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+      &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+      &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+    },
     &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
     &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
     &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -490,6 +495,11 @@
     &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+  &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+    &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+    &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+    &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+  },
   &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -623,6 +633,11 @@
         &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+      &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+        &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+        &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+        &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+      },
       &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
index d185ac6..9cd15e4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
@@ -721,6 +721,11 @@
           &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
         },
         &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+        &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+          &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+          &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+          &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+        },
         &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
         &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
         &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -1324,6 +1329,11 @@
         &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+      &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+        &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+        &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+        &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+      },
       &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -1874,6 +1884,11 @@
             &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
           },
           &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+          &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+            &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+            &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+            &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+          },
           &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
           &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
           &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
index f179183..1d6e660 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.nodePools.html
@@ -312,6 +312,11 @@
       &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
     },
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+    &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+      &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+      &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+      &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+    },
     &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
     &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
     &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -579,6 +584,11 @@
     &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+  &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+    &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+    &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+    &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+  },
   &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
@@ -712,6 +722,11 @@
         &quot;maxPodsPerNode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Constraint enforced on the max num of pods per node.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the node pool.
+      &quot;networkConfig&quot;: { # Parameters for node pool-level network config. Only applicable if `ip_allocation_policy.use_ip_aliases` is true. # Networking configuration for this NodePool. If specified, it overrides the cluster-level defaults.
+        &quot;createPodRange&quot;: True or False, # Input only. [Input only] Whether to create a new range for pod IPs in this node pool. Defaults are provided for `pod_range` and `pod_ipv4_cidr_block` if they are not specified. If neither `create_pod_range` or `pod_range` are specified, the cluster-level default (`ip_allocation_policy.cluster_ipv4_cidr_block`) is used.
+        &quot;podIpv4CidrBlock&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The IP address range for pod IPs in this node pool. Only applicable if `create_pod_range` is true. Set to blank to have a range chosen with the default size. Set to /netmask (e.g. `/14`) to have a range chosen with a specific netmask. Set to a [CIDR](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Classless_Inter-Domain_Routing) notation (e.g. `10.96.0.0/14`) to pick a specific range to use.
+        &quot;podRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the secondary range for pod IPs. If `create_pod_range` is true, this ID is used for the new range.
+      },
       &quot;podIpv4CidrSize&quot;: 42, # [Output only] The pod CIDR block size per node in this node pool.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The status of the nodes in this pool instance.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.annotatedDatasets.html b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.annotatedDatasets.html
index 7f9d095..1ad8e42 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.annotatedDatasets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.annotatedDatasets.html
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@
     &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Configuration for text classification task.
       &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
       &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
         &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
       },
     },
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@
         &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Configuration for text classification task.
           &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
           &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-          &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+          &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
             &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
           },
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.text.html b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.text.html
index 55da8da..f51d8ca 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.text.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.datasets.text.html
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@
   &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Configuration for text classification task. One of text_classification_config and text_entity_extraction_config is required.
     &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
     &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-    &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+    &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
       &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
     },
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.evaluationJobs.html b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.evaluationJobs.html
index 2f6625d..e689d01 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.evaluationJobs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datalabeling_v1beta1.projects.evaluationJobs.html
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@
       &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
         &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
         &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-        &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+        &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
           &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
         },
       },
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@
     &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
       &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
       &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
         &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
       },
     },
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@
     &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
       &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
       &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
         &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
       },
     },
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@
         &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
           &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
           &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-          &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+          &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
             &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
           },
         },
@@ -639,7 +639,7 @@
     &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
       &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
       &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
         &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
       },
     },
@@ -737,7 +737,7 @@
     &quot;textClassificationConfig&quot;: { # Config for text classification human labeling task. # Specify this field if your model version performs text classification. `annotationSpecSet` in this configuration must match EvaluationJob.annotationSpecSet. `allowMultiLabel` in this configuration must match `classificationMetadata.isMultiLabel` in input_config.
       &quot;allowMultiLabel&quot;: True or False, # Optional. If allow_multi_label is true, contributors are able to choose multiple labels for one text segment.
       &quot;annotationSpecSet&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Annotation spec set resource name.
-      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection.
+      &quot;sentimentConfig&quot;: { # Config for setting up sentiments. # Optional. Configs for sentiment selection. We deprecate sentiment analysis in data labeling side as it is incompatible with uCAIP.
         &quot;enableLabelSentimentSelection&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, contributors will have the option to select sentiment of the label they selected, to mark it as negative or positive label. Default is false.
       },
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.conversions.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.conversions.html
index 2fdccc0..6eb22b5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.conversions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.conversions.html
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@
         { # A custom floodlight variable.
           &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
         },
       ],
       &quot;encryptedUserId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alphanumeric encrypted user ID. When set, encryptionInfo should also be specified. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@
           { # A custom floodlight variable.
             &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
           },
         ],
         &quot;encryptedUserId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alphanumeric encrypted user ID. When set, encryptionInfo should also be specified. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@
         { # A custom floodlight variable.
           &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
         },
       ],
       &quot;encryptedUserId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alphanumeric encrypted user ID. When set, encryptionInfo should also be specified. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@
           { # A custom floodlight variable.
             &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
           },
         ],
         &quot;encryptedUserId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alphanumeric encrypted user ID. When set, encryptionInfo should also be specified. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.compatibleFields.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.compatibleFields.html
index c1ed05c..33f5d5d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.compatibleFields.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.compatibleFields.html
@@ -318,8 +318,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.html
index 88d3065..8d2b6e6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_3.reports.html
@@ -369,8 +369,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -689,8 +689,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -1007,8 +1007,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -1350,8 +1350,8 @@
           },
         ],
         &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-          &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-          &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+          &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+          &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
           &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
           &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
           &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -1689,8 +1689,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -2007,8 +2007,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -2366,8 +2366,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -2684,8 +2684,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.conversions.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.conversions.html
index 2055bd7..87c8a6c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.conversions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.conversions.html
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@
         { # A custom floodlight variable.
           &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
         },
       ],
       &quot;dclid&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The display click ID. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserId, encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserId or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@
           { # A custom floodlight variable.
             &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
           },
         ],
         &quot;dclid&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The display click ID. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserId, encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserId or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@
         { # A custom floodlight variable.
           &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
         },
       ],
       &quot;dclid&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The display click ID. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserId, encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserId or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@
           { # A custom floodlight variable.
             &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string &quot;dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable&quot;.
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the &quot;u[1-20]=&quot; in the tags.
-            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 50 characters.
+            &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters.
           },
         ],
         &quot;dclid&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The display click ID. This field is mutually exclusive with encryptedUserId, encryptedUserIdCandidates[], matchId, mobileDeviceId and gclid. This or encryptedUserId or encryptedUserIdCandidates[] or matchId or mobileDeviceId or gclid is a required field.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.compatibleFields.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.compatibleFields.html
index 879614b..c5d1601 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.compatibleFields.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.compatibleFields.html
@@ -498,8 +498,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.html
index 3d17a9d..1739aab 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v3_4.reports.html
@@ -549,8 +549,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -1049,8 +1049,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -1547,8 +1547,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -2070,8 +2070,8 @@
           },
         ],
         &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-          &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-          &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+          &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+          &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
           &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
           &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
           &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -2589,8 +2589,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -3087,8 +3087,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -3626,8 +3626,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
@@ -4124,8 +4124,8 @@
       },
     ],
     &quot;reportProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the report.
-      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
-      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # DFA checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;clicksLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if a click interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
+      &quot;impressionsLookbackWindow&quot;: 42, # CM360 checks to see if an impression interaction occurred within the specified period of time before a conversion. By default the value is pulled from Floodlight or you can manually enter a custom value. Valid values: 1-90.
       &quot;includeAttributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated: has no effect.
       &quot;includeUnattributedCookieConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions of users with a DoubleClick cookie but without an exposure. That means the user did not click or see an ad from the advertiser within the Floodlight group, or that the interaction happened outside the lookback window.
       &quot;includeUnattributedIPConversions&quot;: True or False, # Include conversions that have no associated cookies and no exposures. It’s therefore impossible to know how the user was exposed to your ads during the lookback window prior to a conversion.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/domains_v1alpha2.projects.locations.registrations.html b/docs/dyn/domains_v1alpha2.projects.locations.registrations.html
index 9944993..f0db51f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/domains_v1alpha2.projects.locations.registrations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/domains_v1alpha2.projects.locations.registrations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request for the `ConfigureContactSettings` method.
-  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices required here depend on the values specified in `contact_settings`.
+  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices needed here depend on the values specified in `contact_settings`.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
   &quot;contactSettings&quot;: { # Defines the contact information associated with a `Registration`. [ICANN](https://icann.org/) requires all domain names to have associated contact information. The `registrant_contact` is considered the domain&#x27;s legal owner, and often the other contacts are identical. # Fields of the `ContactSettings` to update.
@@ -1200,7 +1200,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request for the `RegisterDomain` method.
-  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices required here depend on the values specified in `registration.contact_settings`.
+  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices needed here depend on the values specified in `registration.contact_settings`.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
   &quot;domainNotices&quot;: [ # The list of domain notices that you acknowledge. Call `RetrieveRegisterParameters` to see the notices that need acknowledgement.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/domains_v1beta1.projects.locations.registrations.html b/docs/dyn/domains_v1beta1.projects.locations.registrations.html
index 25dc2ce..f0d3ba2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/domains_v1beta1.projects.locations.registrations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/domains_v1beta1.projects.locations.registrations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request for the `ConfigureContactSettings` method.
-  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices required here depend on the values specified in `contact_settings`.
+  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices needed here depend on the values specified in `contact_settings`.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
   &quot;contactSettings&quot;: { # Defines the contact information associated with a `Registration`. [ICANN](https://icann.org/) requires all domain names to have associated contact information. The `registrant_contact` is considered the domain&#x27;s legal owner, and often the other contacts are identical. # Fields of the `ContactSettings` to update.
@@ -1200,7 +1200,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request for the `RegisterDomain` method.
-  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices required here depend on the values specified in `registration.contact_settings`.
+  &quot;contactNotices&quot;: [ # The list of contact notices that the caller acknowledges. The notices needed here depend on the values specified in `registration.contact_settings`.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
   &quot;domainNotices&quot;: [ # The list of domain notices that you acknowledge. Call `RetrieveRegisterParameters` to see the notices that need acknowledgement.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
index 96fcd7e..2efea4f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.changes.html
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@
         &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
         &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
         &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-        &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+        &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
       },
     ],
     &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@
             &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
             &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
             &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-            &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+            &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
           },
         ],
         &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html
index 35b244c..175a252 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.files.html
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -780,7 +780,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -2418,7 +2418,7 @@
           &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
           &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
           &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-          &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+          &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
         },
       ],
       &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -2815,7 +2815,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -3591,7 +3591,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -3972,7 +3972,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -4353,7 +4353,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -4730,7 +4730,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
@@ -5127,7 +5127,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;quotaBytesUsed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of quota bytes used by this file.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.properties.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.properties.html
index 1951801..6943550 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v2.properties.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v2.properties.html
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }
 
 
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@
       &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+      &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     },
   ],
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#propertyList&quot;, # This is always drive#propertyList.
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }
 
   visibility: string, The visibility of the property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }
 
   visibility: string, The visibility of the property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;drive#property&quot;, # This is always drive#property.
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The link back to this property.
   &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The value of this property.
-  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE)
+  &quot;visibility&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The visibility of this property. Allowed values are PRIVATE and PUBLIC. (Default: PRIVATE). Private properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
index 0743805..4861b8a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.changes.html
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
       &quot;driveId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the shared drive associated with this change.
       &quot;file&quot;: { # The metadata for a file. # The updated state of the file. Present if the type is file and the file has not been removed from this list of changes.
         &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-            # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+            # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
         &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html
index a225fdf..73caf79 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drive_v3.files.html
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
 
 { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -401,7 +401,7 @@
 
     { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -664,7 +664,7 @@
 
 { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -932,7 +932,7 @@
 
     { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -1262,7 +1262,7 @@
 
     { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@
   &quot;files&quot;: [ # The list of files. If nextPageToken is populated, then this list may be incomplete and an additional page of results should be fetched.
     { # The metadata for a file.
       &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-          # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+          # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
       &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@
 
 { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
@@ -2114,7 +2114,7 @@
 
     { # The metadata for a file.
   &quot;appProperties&quot;: { # A collection of arbitrary key-value pairs which are private to the requesting app.
-      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests.
+      # Entries with null values are cleared in update and copy requests. These properties can only be retrieved using an authenticated request. An authenticated request uses an access token obtained with a OAuth 2 client ID. You cannot use an API key to retrieve private properties.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
   &quot;capabilities&quot;: { # Capabilities the current user has on this file. Each capability corresponds to a fine-grained action that a user may take.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.html
index 8d43161..9079a8c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.html
@@ -124,20 +124,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -148,18 +148,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -189,12 +189,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -222,20 +222,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -246,18 +246,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -287,12 +287,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -344,20 +344,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -368,18 +368,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -409,12 +409,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -452,20 +452,20 @@
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
       &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
         &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
         &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
         &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
           &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
           &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
         },
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-        &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-          &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+        &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+          &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
             &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
             &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
             &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
                 },
@@ -476,18 +476,18 @@
               &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
             },
             &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
                 &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
               },
             ],
             &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-              { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+              { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
                 &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
                 &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
                 &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -517,12 +517,12 @@
           &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
-          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
           &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
             &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
             &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
           },
-          &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+          &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
           &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
         },
       },
@@ -568,20 +568,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -592,18 +592,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -633,12 +633,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -666,20 +666,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -690,18 +690,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -731,12 +731,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.releases.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.releases.html
index 15afd5f..6fc9012 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.releases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.channels.releases.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.</p>
@@ -94,29 +94,29 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
+  <pre>Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The site that the release belongs to, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site to which the release belongs, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -127,18 +127,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -168,17 +168,17 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }
 
-  versionName: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: /sites/site-name /versions/versionID The site-name in this version identifier must match the site-name in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
+  versionName: string,  The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID The SITE_NAME in this version identifier must match the SITE_NAME in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -189,20 +189,20 @@
 
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -213,18 +213,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -254,12 +254,12 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }</pre>
@@ -270,9 +270,9 @@
   <pre>Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent for which to list files, in the format: sites/site-name (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 100.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided.
+  parent: string, Required. The site for which to list releases, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of releases to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer releases exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 100.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListReleases` that tells the server where to resume listing.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -282,24 +282,24 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there are additional releases remaining beyond the ones in this response, then supply this token in the next [`list`](../sites.versions.files/list) call to continue with the next set of releases.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListReleases`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
   &quot;releases&quot;: [ # The list of hashes of files that still need to be uploaded, if any exist.
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
       &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
       &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
       &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
         &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
         &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
       },
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
           &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
           &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
           &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
               },
@@ -310,18 +310,18 @@
             &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
           },
           &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
             },
           ],
           &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-            { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+            { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
               &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
               &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -351,12 +351,12 @@
         &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
         &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
           &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
           &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
         },
-        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
         &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
       },
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.releases.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.releases.html
index 3da2949..cdbb97c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.releases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.releases.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.</p>
@@ -94,29 +94,29 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
+  <pre>Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The site that the release belongs to, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site to which the release belongs, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -127,18 +127,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -168,17 +168,17 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }
 
-  versionName: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: /sites/site-name /versions/versionID The site-name in this version identifier must match the site-name in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
+  versionName: string,  The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID The SITE_NAME in this version identifier must match the SITE_NAME in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -189,20 +189,20 @@
 
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -213,18 +213,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -254,12 +254,12 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }</pre>
@@ -270,9 +270,9 @@
   <pre>Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent for which to list files, in the format: sites/site-name (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 100.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided.
+  parent: string, Required. The site for which to list releases, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of releases to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer releases exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 100.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListReleases` that tells the server where to resume listing.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -282,24 +282,24 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there are additional releases remaining beyond the ones in this response, then supply this token in the next [`list`](../sites.versions.files/list) call to continue with the next set of releases.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListReleases`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
   &quot;releases&quot;: [ # The list of hashes of files that still need to be uploaded, if any exist.
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
       &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
       &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
       &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
         &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
         &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
       },
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
           &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
           &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
           &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
               },
@@ -310,18 +310,18 @@
             &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
           },
           &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
             },
           ],
           &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-            { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+            { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
               &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
               &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -351,12 +351,12 @@
         &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
         &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
           &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
           &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
         },
-        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
         &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
       },
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.files.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.files.html
index 25966cc..d1830a3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.files.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.files.html
@@ -94,10 +94,10 @@
   <pre>Lists the remaining files to be uploaded for the specified version.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent to list files for, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 1000.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided. This will be the encoded version of a firebase.hosting.proto.metadata.ListFilesPageToken.
-  status: string, The type of files in the version that should be listed.
+  parent: string, Required. The version for which to list files, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/versions/VERSION_ID (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of version files to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer version files exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListVersionFiles` that tells the server where to resume listing.
+  status: string,  The type of files that should be listed for the specified version.
     Allowed values
       STATUS_UNSPECIFIED - The default status; should not be intentionally used.
       EXPECTED - The file has been included in the version and is expected to be uploaded in the near future.
@@ -111,14 +111,14 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;files&quot;: [ # The list path/hashes in the specified version.
+  &quot;files&quot;: [ #  The list of paths to the hashes of the files in the specified version.
     { # A static content file that is part of a version.
       &quot;hash&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SHA256 content hash of the file.
       &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URI at which the file&#x27;s content should display.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current status of a particular file in the specified version. The value will be either `pending upload` or `uploaded`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListVersionFiles`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.html
index 88e3f2a..85706c8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.projects.sites.versions.html
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, sizeBytes=None, versionId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new version for a site.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new version for the specified site.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified version.</p>
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates the specified metadata for a version. Note that this method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](../sites.versions/delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the specified metadata for the specified version. This method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#populateFiles">populateFiles(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Adds content files to a version. Each file must be under 2 GB.</p>
+<p class="firstline"> Adds content files to the specified version. Each file must be under 2 GB.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="clone">clone(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -164,20 +164,20 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, sizeBytes=None, versionId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new version for a site.
+  <pre>Creates a new version for the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent to create the version for, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site in which to create the version, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+{ # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -188,18 +188,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -229,12 +229,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }
 
@@ -248,13 +248,13 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -265,18 +265,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -306,12 +306,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes the specified version.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the version to be deleted, in the format: sites/ site-name/versions/versionID (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the version to be deleted, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/versions/VERSION_ID (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -354,13 +354,13 @@
     {
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist
   &quot;versions&quot;: [ # The list of versions, if any exist.
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -371,18 +371,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -412,12 +412,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   ],
@@ -440,20 +440,20 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates the specified metadata for a version. Note that this method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](../sites.versions/delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.
+  <pre>Updates the specified metadata for the specified version. This method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint. (required)
+  name: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+{ # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -464,18 +464,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -505,12 +505,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }
 
@@ -523,13 +523,13 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -540,18 +540,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -581,27 +581,27 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="populateFiles">populateFiles(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Adds content files to a version. Each file must be under 2 GB.
+  <pre> Adds content files to the specified version. Each file must be under 2 GB.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The version to add files to, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The version to which to add files, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The request to populate a Version&#x27;s Files.
-  &quot;files&quot;: { # A set of file paths to the hashes corresponding to assets that should be added to the version. Note that a file path to an empty hash will remove the path from the version. Calculate a hash by Gzipping the file then taking the SHA256 hash of the newly compressed file.
+{
+  &quot;files&quot;: { # A set of file paths to the hashes corresponding to assets that should be added to the version. A file path to an empty hash will remove the path from the version. Calculate a hash by Gzipping the file then taking the SHA256 hash of the newly compressed file.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
 }
@@ -615,10 +615,10 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;uploadRequiredHashes&quot;: [ # The content hashes of the specified files that need to be uploaded to the specified endpoint.
+  &quot;uploadRequiredHashes&quot;: [ # The content hashes of the specified files that need to be uploaded to the specified URL.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
-  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL to which the files should be uploaded, in the format: &quot;https://upload-firebasehosting.googleapis.com/upload/sites/site-name /versions/versionID/files&quot;. Perform a multipart `POST` of the Gzipped file contents to the URL using a forward slash and the hash of the file appended to the end.
+  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL to which the files should be uploaded, in the format: &quot;https://upload-firebasehosting.googleapis.com/upload/sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID/files&quot; Perform a multipart `POST` of the Gzipped file contents to the URL using a forward slash and the hash of the file appended to the end.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.html
index 9c1c200..7ee2ee8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.html
@@ -124,20 +124,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -148,18 +148,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -189,12 +189,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -222,20 +222,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -246,18 +246,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -287,12 +287,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -344,20 +344,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -368,18 +368,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -409,12 +409,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -452,20 +452,20 @@
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
       &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
         &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
         &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
         &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
           &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
           &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
         },
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-        &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-          &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+        &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+          &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
             &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
             &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
             &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
                 },
@@ -476,18 +476,18 @@
               &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
             },
             &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
                 &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
               },
             ],
             &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-              { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+              { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
                 &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
                 &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+                &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
                 &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
                 &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -517,12 +517,12 @@
           &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
-          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
           &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
             &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
             &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
           },
-          &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+          &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
           &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
         },
       },
@@ -568,20 +568,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -592,18 +592,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -633,12 +633,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
@@ -666,20 +666,20 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fully-qualified identifier of the Channel.
   &quot;release&quot;: { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time. # Output only. The current release for the channel, if any.
     &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
     &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
     &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
       &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
       &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
     },
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -690,18 +690,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -731,12 +731,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.releases.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.releases.html
index 095fbef..27fd853 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.releases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.channels.releases.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.</p>
@@ -94,29 +94,29 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
+  <pre>Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The site that the release belongs to, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site to which the release belongs, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -127,18 +127,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -168,17 +168,17 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }
 
-  versionName: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: /sites/site-name /versions/versionID The site-name in this version identifier must match the site-name in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
+  versionName: string,  The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID The SITE_NAME in this version identifier must match the SITE_NAME in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -189,20 +189,20 @@
 
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -213,18 +213,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -254,12 +254,12 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }</pre>
@@ -270,9 +270,9 @@
   <pre>Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent for which to list files, in the format: sites/site-name (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 100.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided.
+  parent: string, Required. The site for which to list releases, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of releases to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer releases exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 100.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListReleases` that tells the server where to resume listing.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -282,24 +282,24 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there are additional releases remaining beyond the ones in this response, then supply this token in the next [`list`](../sites.versions.files/list) call to continue with the next set of releases.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListReleases`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
   &quot;releases&quot;: [ # The list of hashes of files that still need to be uploaded, if any exist.
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
       &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
       &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
       &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
         &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
         &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
       },
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
           &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
           &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
           &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
               },
@@ -310,18 +310,18 @@
             &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
           },
           &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
             },
           ],
           &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-            { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+            { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
               &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
               &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -351,12 +351,12 @@
         &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
         &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
           &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
           &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
         },
-        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
         &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
       },
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.releases.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.releases.html
index 71e159a..f05fc4d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.releases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.releases.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.</p>
@@ -94,29 +94,29 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, versionName=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new release which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
+  <pre>Creates a new release, which makes the content of the specified version actively display on the appropriate URL(s).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The site that the release belongs to, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site to which the release belongs, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -127,18 +127,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -168,17 +168,17 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }
 
-  versionName: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: /sites/site-name /versions/versionID The site-name in this version identifier must match the site-name in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
+  versionName: string,  The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID The SITE_NAME in this version identifier must match the SITE_NAME in the `parent` parameter. This query parameter must be empty if the `type` field in the request body is `SITE_DISABLE`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -189,20 +189,20 @@
 
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
   &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
   &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
   &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
     &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
     &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
   },
   &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+  &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+    &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
       &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
       &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
       &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
@@ -213,18 +213,18 @@
         &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
       },
       &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
         },
       ],
       &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-        { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+        { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
           &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
           &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
           &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
           &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -254,12 +254,12 @@
     &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
     &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
       &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
       &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
     },
-    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+    &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
     &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
   },
 }</pre>
@@ -270,9 +270,9 @@
   <pre>Lists the releases that have been created on the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent for which to list files, in the format: sites/site-name (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 100.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided.
+  parent: string, Required. The site for which to list releases, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of releases to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer releases exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 100.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListReleases` that tells the server where to resume listing.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -282,24 +282,24 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there are additional releases remaining beyond the ones in this response, then supply this token in the next [`list`](../sites.versions.files/list) call to continue with the next set of releases.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListReleases`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
   &quot;releases&quot;: [ # The list of hashes of files that still need to be uploaded, if any exist.
     { # A `Release` is a particular [collection of configurations and files](sites.versions) that is set to be public at a particular time.
       &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy description when the release was created. The value can be up to 512 characters.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ site-name/releases/releaseID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The unique identifier for the release, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/releases/RELEASE_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateRelease`](sites.releases/create).
       &quot;releaseTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the version is set to be public.
       &quot;releaseUser&quot;: { # Contains metadata about the user who performed an action, such as creating a release or finalizing a version. # Output only. Identifies the user who created the release.
         &quot;email&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address of the user when the user performed the action.
         &quot;imageUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A profile image URL for the user. May not be present if the user has changed their email address or deleted their account.
       },
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Explains the reason for the release. Specify a value for this field only when creating a `SITE_DISABLE` type release.
-      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
-        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+      &quot;version&quot;: { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed. # Output only. The configuration and content that was released.
+        &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
           &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
           &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
           &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
               },
@@ -310,18 +310,18 @@
             &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
           },
           &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
             },
           ],
           &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-            { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+            { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
               &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
               &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+              &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
               &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
               &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -351,12 +351,12 @@
         &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
         &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
           &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
           &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
         },
-        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+        &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
         &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
       },
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.files.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.files.html
index 808c3d7..29bd5bb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.files.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.files.html
@@ -94,10 +94,10 @@
   <pre>Lists the remaining files to be uploaded for the specified version.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent to list files for, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The page size to return. Defaults to 1000.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token from a previous request, if provided. This will be the encoded version of a firebase.hosting.proto.metadata.ListFilesPageToken.
-  status: string, The type of files in the version that should be listed.
+  parent: string, Required. The version for which to list files, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/versions/VERSION_ID (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of version files to return. The service may return a lower number if fewer version files exist than this maximum number. If unspecified, defaults to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, A token from a previous call to `ListVersionFiles` that tells the server where to resume listing.
+  status: string,  The type of files that should be listed for the specified version.
     Allowed values
       STATUS_UNSPECIFIED - The default status; should not be intentionally used.
       EXPECTED - The file has been included in the version and is expected to be uploaded in the near future.
@@ -111,14 +111,14 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;files&quot;: [ # The list path/hashes in the specified version.
+  &quot;files&quot;: [ #  The list of paths to the hashes of the files in the specified version.
     { # A static content file that is part of a version.
       &quot;hash&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The SHA256 content hash of the file.
       &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URI at which the file&#x27;s content should display.
       &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current status of a particular file in the specified version. The value will be either `pending upload` or `uploaded`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist beyond the ones in this response. Include this token in your next call to `ListVersionFiles`. Page tokens are short-lived and should not be stored.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.html b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.html
index de316bd..a280ba0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasehosting_v1beta1.sites.versions.html
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, sizeBytes=None, versionId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new version for a site.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new version for the specified site.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified version.</p>
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates the specified metadata for a version. Note that this method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](../sites.versions/delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the specified metadata for the specified version. This method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#populateFiles">populateFiles(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Adds content files to a version. Each file must be under 2 GB.</p>
+<p class="firstline"> Adds content files to the specified version. Each file must be under 2 GB.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="clone">clone(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -164,20 +164,20 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, sizeBytes=None, versionId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new version for a site.
+  <pre>Creates a new version for the specified site.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The parent to create the version for, in the format: sites/ site-name (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The site in which to create the version, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+{ # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -188,18 +188,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -229,12 +229,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }
 
@@ -248,13 +248,13 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -265,18 +265,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -306,12 +306,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes the specified version.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the version to be deleted, in the format: sites/ site-name/versions/versionID (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the version to be deleted, in the format: sites/ SITE_NAME/versions/VERSION_ID (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -354,13 +354,13 @@
     {
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pagination token, if more results exist
   &quot;versions&quot;: [ # The list of versions, if any exist.
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+      &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
         &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
         &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
         &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-          { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
@@ -371,18 +371,18 @@
           &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
         },
         &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-          { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+          { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
           },
         ],
         &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-          { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+          { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
             &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
             &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+            &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
             &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
             &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -412,12 +412,12 @@
       &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
       &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
         &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
         &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
       },
-      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
       &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
     },
   ],
@@ -440,20 +440,20 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates the specified metadata for a version. Note that this method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](../sites.versions/delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.
+  <pre>Updates the specified metadata for the specified version. This method will fail with `FAILED_PRECONDITION` in the event of an invalid state transition. The only valid transition for a version is currently from a `CREATED` status to a `FINALIZED` status. Use [`DeleteVersion`](delete) to set the status of a version to `DELETED`.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint. (required)
+  name: string, The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+{ # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -464,18 +464,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -505,12 +505,12 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }
 
@@ -523,13 +523,13 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # A `Version` is the collection of configuration and [static files](sites.versions.files) that determine how a site is displayed.
-  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
+    { # A `Version` is a configuration and a collection of static files which determine how a site is displayed.
+  &quot;config&quot;: { # The configuration for how incoming requests to a site should be routed and processed before serving content. The URL request paths are matched against the specified URL patterns in the configuration, then Hosting applies the applicable configuration according to a specific [priority order](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#hosting_priority_order). # The configuration for the behavior of the site. This configuration exists in the [`firebase.json`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/cli/#the_firebasejson_file) file.
     &quot;appAssociation&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # How to handle well known App Association files.
     &quot;cleanUrls&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether to drop the file extension from uploaded files.
     &quot;headers&quot;: [ # An array of objects, where each object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-      { # A [`header`](/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) is an object that specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Header`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#headers) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to apply the specified custom response headers.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;headers&quot;: { # Required. The additional headers to add to the response.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
@@ -540,18 +540,18 @@
       &quot;root&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The user-supplied path where country and language specific content will be looked for within the public directory.
     },
     &quot;redirects&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called redirect rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-      { # A [`redirect`](/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+      { # A [`Redirect`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#redirects) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond with a redirect to the specified destination path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The value to put in the HTTP location header of the response. The location can contain capture group values from the pattern using a `:` prefix to identify the segment and an optional `*` to capture the rest of the URL. For example: &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;/:capture*&quot;, &quot;statusCode&quot;: 301, &quot;location&quot;: &quot;https://example.com/foo/:capture&quot;
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;statusCode&quot;: 42, # Required. The status HTTP code to return in the response. It must be a valid 3xx status code.
       },
     ],
     &quot;rewrites&quot;: [ # An array of objects (called rewrite rules), where each rule specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
-      { # A [`rewrite`](/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) object specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
+      { # A [`Rewrite`](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#rewrites) specifies a URL pattern that, if matched to the request URL path, triggers Hosting to respond as if the service were given the specified destination URL.
         &quot;dynamicLinks&quot;: True or False, # The request will be forwarded to Firebase Dynamic Links.
         &quot;function&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The function to proxy requests to. Must match the exported function name exactly.
-        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
+        &quot;glob&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied [glob](https://firebase.google.com/docs/hosting/full-config#glob_pattern_matching) to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;path&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL path to rewrite the request to.
         &quot;regex&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The user-supplied RE2 regular expression to match against the request URL path.
         &quot;run&quot;: { # A configured rewrite that directs requests to a Cloud Run service. If the Cloud Run service does not exist when setting or updating your Firebase Hosting configuration, then the request fails. Any errors from the Cloud Run service are passed to the end user (for example, if you delete a service, any requests directed to that service receive a `404` error). # The request will be forwarded to Cloud Run.
@@ -581,27 +581,27 @@
   &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels used for extra metadata and/or filtering.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID This name is provided in the response body when you call the [`CreateVersion`](../sites.versions/create) endpoint.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The unique identifier for a version, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID This name is provided in the response body when you call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create).
   &quot;preview&quot;: { # Version preview configuration. If active and unexpired, this version will be accessible via a custom URL even if it is not the currently released version. Deprecated in favor of site channels. # Deprecated in favor of site channels. Version preview configuration for the site version. This configuration specifies whether previewing is enabled for this site version. Version previews allow you to preview your site at a custom URL before releasing it as the live version.
     &quot;active&quot;: True or False, # If true, preview URLs are enabled for this version.
     &quot;expireTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Indicates the expiration time for previewing this version; preview URL requests received after this time will 404.
   },
-  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call the [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) endpoint to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling the [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete) endpoint.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The deploy status of a version. For a successful deploy, call [`CreateVersion`](sites.versions/create) to make a new version (`CREATED` status), [upload all desired files](sites.versions/populateFiles) to the version, then [update](sites.versions/patch) the version to the `FINALIZED` status. Note that if you leave the version in the `CREATED` state for more than 12 hours, the system will automatically mark the version as `ABANDONED`. You can also change the status of a version to `DELETED` by calling [`DeleteVersion`](sites.versions/delete).
   &quot;versionBytes&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The total stored bytesize of the version. This value is calculated after a version is `FINALIZED`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="populateFiles">populateFiles(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Adds content files to a version. Each file must be under 2 GB.
+  <pre> Adds content files to the specified version. Each file must be under 2 GB.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The version to add files to, in the format: sites/site-name /versions/versionID (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The version to which to add files, in the format: sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The request to populate a Version&#x27;s Files.
-  &quot;files&quot;: { # A set of file paths to the hashes corresponding to assets that should be added to the version. Note that a file path to an empty hash will remove the path from the version. Calculate a hash by Gzipping the file then taking the SHA256 hash of the newly compressed file.
+{
+  &quot;files&quot;: { # A set of file paths to the hashes corresponding to assets that should be added to the version. A file path to an empty hash will remove the path from the version. Calculate a hash by Gzipping the file then taking the SHA256 hash of the newly compressed file.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
 }
@@ -615,10 +615,10 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     {
-  &quot;uploadRequiredHashes&quot;: [ # The content hashes of the specified files that need to be uploaded to the specified endpoint.
+  &quot;uploadRequiredHashes&quot;: [ # The content hashes of the specified files that need to be uploaded to the specified URL.
     &quot;A String&quot;,
   ],
-  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL to which the files should be uploaded, in the format: &quot;https://upload-firebasehosting.googleapis.com/upload/sites/site-name /versions/versionID/files&quot;. Perform a multipart `POST` of the Gzipped file contents to the URL using a forward slash and the hash of the file appended to the end.
+  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL to which the files should be uploaded, in the format: &quot;https://upload-firebasehosting.googleapis.com/upload/sites/SITE_NAME /versions/VERSION_ID/files&quot; Perform a multipart `POST` of the Gzipped file contents to the URL using a forward slash and the hash of the file appended to the end.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/fitness_v1.users.dataSources.datasets.html b/docs/dyn/fitness_v1.users.dataSources.datasets.html
index d4ed75a..f5e9b4f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/fitness_v1.users.dataSources.datasets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/fitness_v1.users.dataSources.datasets.html
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(userId, dataSourceId, datasetId, body=None, currentTimeMillis=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Adds data points to a dataset. The dataset need not be previously created. All points within the given dataset will be returned with subsquent calls to retrieve this dataset. Data points can belong to more than one dataset. This method does not use patch semantics.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Adds data points to a dataset. The dataset need not be previously created. All points within the given dataset will be returned with subsquent calls to retrieve this dataset. Data points can belong to more than one dataset. This method does not use patch semantics: the data points provided are merely inserted, with no existing data replaced.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch_next">patch_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
@@ -183,12 +183,12 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(userId, dataSourceId, datasetId, body=None, currentTimeMillis=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Adds data points to a dataset. The dataset need not be previously created. All points within the given dataset will be returned with subsquent calls to retrieve this dataset. Data points can belong to more than one dataset. This method does not use patch semantics.
+  <pre>Adds data points to a dataset. The dataset need not be previously created. All points within the given dataset will be returned with subsquent calls to retrieve this dataset. Data points can belong to more than one dataset. This method does not use patch semantics: the data points provided are merely inserted, with no existing data replaced.
 
 Args:
   userId: string, Patch a dataset for the person identified. Use me to indicate the authenticated user. Only me is supported at this time. (required)
   dataSourceId: string, The data stream ID of the data source that created the dataset. (required)
-  datasetId: string, Dataset identifier that is a composite of the minimum data point start time and maximum data point end time represented as nanoseconds from the epoch. The ID is formatted like: &quot;startTime-endTime&quot; where startTime and endTime are 64 bit integers. (required)
+  datasetId: string, This field is not used, and can be safely omitted. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.messages.html b/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.messages.html
index 06de04d..0c60657 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.messages.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.messages.html
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@
 
 Args:
   userId: string, The user&#x27;s email address. The special value `me` can be used to indicate the authenticated user. (required)
-  id: string, The ID of the message to retrieve. (required)
+  id: string, The ID of the message to retrieve. This ID is usually retrieved using `messages.list`. The ID is also contained in the result when a message is inserted (`messages.insert`) or imported (`messages.import`). (required)
   format: string, The format to return the message in.
     Allowed values
       minimal - Returns only email message ID and labels; does not return the email headers, body, or payload.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.settings.sendAs.html b/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.settings.sendAs.html
index 662cac2..9deaea2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.settings.sendAs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/gmail_v1.users.settings.sendAs.html
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@
       &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
       &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
       &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-      &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+      &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
       &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
         &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
         &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@
   &quot;isPrimary&quot;: True or False, # Whether this address is the primary address used to login to the account. Every Gmail account has exactly one primary address, and it cannot be deleted from the collection of send-as aliases. This field is read-only.
   &quot;replyToAddress&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional email address that is included in a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, Gmail will not generate a &quot;Reply-To:&quot; header.
   &quot;sendAsEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email address that appears in the &quot;From:&quot; header for mail sent using this alias. This is read-only for all operations except create.
-  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI.
+  &quot;signature&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional HTML signature that is included in messages composed with this alias in the Gmail web UI. This signature is added to new emails only.
   &quot;smtpMsa&quot;: { # Configuration for communication with an SMTP service. # An optional SMTP service that will be used as an outbound relay for mail sent using this alias. If this is empty, outbound mail will be sent directly from Gmail&#x27;s servers to the destination SMTP service. This setting only applies to custom &quot;from&quot; aliases.
     &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The hostname of the SMTP service. Required.
     &quot;password&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The password that will be used for authentication with the SMTP service. This is a write-only field that can be specified in requests to create or update SendAs settings; it is never populated in responses.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/groupssettings_v1.groups.html b/docs/dyn/groupssettings_v1.groups.html
index a9d2e74..7dd16d1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/groupssettings_v1.groups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/groupssettings_v1.groups.html
@@ -218,6 +218,7 @@
       # - ALL_MANAGERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ALL_MEMBERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ANYONE_CAN_CONTACT
+      # - ALL_OWNERS_CAN_CONTACT
   &quot;whoCanDeleteAnyPost&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated. This is merged into the new whoCanModerateContent setting. Specifies who can delete replies to topics. (Authors can always delete their own posts). Possible values are:
       # - ALL_MEMBERS
       # - OWNERS_AND_MANAGERS
@@ -493,6 +494,7 @@
       # - ALL_MANAGERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ALL_MEMBERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ANYONE_CAN_CONTACT
+      # - ALL_OWNERS_CAN_CONTACT
   &quot;whoCanDeleteAnyPost&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated. This is merged into the new whoCanModerateContent setting. Specifies who can delete replies to topics. (Authors can always delete their own posts). Possible values are:
       # - ALL_MEMBERS
       # - OWNERS_AND_MANAGERS
@@ -762,6 +764,7 @@
       # - ALL_MANAGERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ALL_MEMBERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ANYONE_CAN_CONTACT
+      # - ALL_OWNERS_CAN_CONTACT
   &quot;whoCanDeleteAnyPost&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated. This is merged into the new whoCanModerateContent setting. Specifies who can delete replies to topics. (Authors can always delete their own posts). Possible values are:
       # - ALL_MEMBERS
       # - OWNERS_AND_MANAGERS
@@ -1037,6 +1040,7 @@
       # - ALL_MANAGERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ALL_MEMBERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ANYONE_CAN_CONTACT
+      # - ALL_OWNERS_CAN_CONTACT
   &quot;whoCanDeleteAnyPost&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated. This is merged into the new whoCanModerateContent setting. Specifies who can delete replies to topics. (Authors can always delete their own posts). Possible values are:
       # - ALL_MEMBERS
       # - OWNERS_AND_MANAGERS
@@ -1306,6 +1310,7 @@
       # - ALL_MANAGERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ALL_MEMBERS_CAN_CONTACT
       # - ANYONE_CAN_CONTACT
+      # - ALL_OWNERS_CAN_CONTACT
   &quot;whoCanDeleteAnyPost&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Deprecated. This is merged into the new whoCanModerateContent setting. Specifies who can delete replies to topics. (Authors can always delete their own posts). Possible values are:
       # - ALL_MEMBERS
       # - OWNERS_AND_MANAGERS
diff --git a/docs/dyn/homegraph_v1.devices.html b/docs/dyn/homegraph_v1.devices.html
index b10715b..15bbbcd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/homegraph_v1.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/homegraph_v1.devices.html
@@ -84,6 +84,9 @@
   <code><a href="#reportStateAndNotification">reportStateAndNotification(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Reports device state and optionally sends device notifications. Called by your smart home Action when the state of a third-party device changes or you need to send a notification about the device. See [Implement Report State](https://developers.google.com/assistant/smarthome/develop/report-state) for more information. This method updates the device state according to its declared [traits](https://developers.google.com/assistant/smarthome/concepts/devices-traits). Publishing a new state value outside of these traits will result in an `INVALID_ARGUMENT` error response. The third-party user's identity is passed in via the `agent_user_id` (see ReportStateAndNotificationRequest). This request must be authorized using service account credentials from your Actions console project.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#requestLink">requestLink(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Sends an account linking suggestion to users associated with any potential Cast devices detected by third-party devices. This request must be authorized using service account credentials from your Actions console project.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#requestSync">requestSync(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Requests Google to send an `action.devices.SYNC` [intent](https://developers.google.com/assistant/smarthome/reference/intent/sync) to your smart home Action to update device metadata for the given user. The third-party user's identity is passed via the `agent_user_id` (see RequestSyncDevicesRequest). This request must be authorized using service account credentials from your Actions console project.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
@@ -178,6 +181,36 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="requestLink">requestLink(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Sends an account linking suggestion to users associated with any potential Cast devices detected by third-party devices. This request must be authorized using service account credentials from your Actions console project.
+
+Args:
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request type for the [`RequestLink`](#google.home.graph.v1.HomeGraphApiService.RequestLink) call.
+  &quot;payload&quot;: { # Payload containing potential devices detected and when they were detected. # Required. ID(s) and detection time of potential Cast devices.
+    &quot;detectionTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Time at which devices represented in `potential_cast_device_ids` were detected.
+    &quot;potentialCastDeviceIds&quot;: [ # Required. List of device IDs detected that may potentially be for Cast devices.
+      &quot;A String&quot;,
+    ],
+  },
+  &quot;requestId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Request ID used for debugging.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="requestSync">requestSync(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Requests Google to send an `action.devices.SYNC` [intent](https://developers.google.com/assistant/smarthome/reference/intent/sync) to your smart home Action to update device metadata for the given user. The third-party user&#x27;s identity is passed via the `agent_user_id` (see RequestSyncDevicesRequest). This request must be authorized using service account credentials from your Actions console project.
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.buckets.html
index e92fd3d..e567d7e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.buckets.html
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
index 8832bb7..1586972 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.buckets.html
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
       &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
       &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
       &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
     },
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.logs.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.logs.html
index 900f3d5..7e1dea5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.logs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.logs.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resourceNames=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the logs in projects, organizations, folders, or billing accounts. Only logs that have entries are listed.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
+  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
 
 Args:
   logName: string, Required. The resource name of the log to delete: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; [LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded. For example, &quot;projects/my-project-id/logs/syslog&quot;, &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. For more information about log names, see LogEntry. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
index 1c84e4f..3897a68 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@
     { # Result returned from ListSinks.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there might be more results than appear in this response, then nextPageToken is included. To get the next set of results, call the same method again using the value of nextPageToken as pageToken.
   &quot;sinks&quot;: [ # A list of sinks.
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
       &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
         &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
         &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
index 0f27523..2f24773 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
@@ -148,11 +148,11 @@
       &quot;jsonPayload&quot;: { # The log entry payload, represented as a structure that is expressed as a JSON object.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
       },
-      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.Cloud Logging truncates label keys that exceed 512 B and label values that exceed 64 KB upon their associated log entry being written. The truncation is indicated by an ellipsis at the end of the character string.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
       &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The resource name of the log to which this log entry belongs: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; A project number may be used in place of PROJECT_ID. The project number is translated to its corresponding PROJECT_ID internally and the log_name field will contain PROJECT_ID in queries and exports.[LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded within log_name. Example: &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. [LOG_ID] must be less than 512 characters long and can only include the following characters: upper and lower case alphanumeric characters, forward-slash, underscore, hyphen, and period.For backward compatibility, if log_name begins with a forward-slash, such as /projects/..., then the log entry is ingested as usual but the forward-slash is removed. Listing the log entry will not show the leading slash and filtering for a log name with a leading slash will never return any results.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the LogEntry.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the log entry.
         &quot;systemLabels&quot;: { # Output only. Values for predefined system metadata labels. System labels are a kind of metadata extracted by Google, including &quot;machine_image&quot;, &quot;vpc&quot;, &quot;subnet_id&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;, &quot;name&quot;, etc. System label values can be only strings, Boolean values, or a list of strings. For example: { &quot;name&quot;: &quot;my-test-instance&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;: [&quot;a&quot;, &quot;b&quot;, &quot;c&quot;], &quot;spot_instance&quot;: false }
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
@@ -255,11 +255,11 @@
       &quot;jsonPayload&quot;: { # The log entry payload, represented as a structure that is expressed as a JSON object.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
       },
-      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.Cloud Logging truncates label keys that exceed 512 B and label values that exceed 64 KB upon their associated log entry being written. The truncation is indicated by an ellipsis at the end of the character string.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
       &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The resource name of the log to which this log entry belongs: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; A project number may be used in place of PROJECT_ID. The project number is translated to its corresponding PROJECT_ID internally and the log_name field will contain PROJECT_ID in queries and exports.[LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded within log_name. Example: &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. [LOG_ID] must be less than 512 characters long and can only include the following characters: upper and lower case alphanumeric characters, forward-slash, underscore, hyphen, and period.For backward compatibility, if log_name begins with a forward-slash, such as /projects/..., then the log entry is ingested as usual but the forward-slash is removed. Listing the log entry will not show the leading slash and filtering for a log name with a leading slash will never return any results.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the LogEntry.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the log entry.
         &quot;systemLabels&quot;: { # Output only. Values for predefined system metadata labels. System labels are a kind of metadata extracted by Google, including &quot;machine_image&quot;, &quot;vpc&quot;, &quot;subnet_id&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;, &quot;name&quot;, etc. System label values can be only strings, Boolean values, or a list of strings. For example: { &quot;name&quot;: &quot;my-test-instance&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;: [&quot;a&quot;, &quot;b&quot;, &quot;c&quot;], &quot;spot_instance&quot;: false }
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
@@ -338,11 +338,11 @@
       &quot;jsonPayload&quot;: { # The log entry payload, represented as a structure that is expressed as a JSON object.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
       },
-      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. A set of user-defined (key, value) data that provides additional information about the log entry.Cloud Logging truncates label keys that exceed 512 B and label values that exceed 64 KB upon their associated log entry being written. The truncation is indicated by an ellipsis at the end of the character string.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
       &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The resource name of the log to which this log entry belongs: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; A project number may be used in place of PROJECT_ID. The project number is translated to its corresponding PROJECT_ID internally and the log_name field will contain PROJECT_ID in queries and exports.[LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded within log_name. Example: &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. [LOG_ID] must be less than 512 characters long and can only include the following characters: upper and lower case alphanumeric characters, forward-slash, underscore, hyphen, and period.For backward compatibility, if log_name begins with a forward-slash, such as /projects/..., then the log entry is ingested as usual but the forward-slash is removed. Listing the log entry will not show the leading slash and filtering for a log name with a leading slash will never return any results.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the LogEntry.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Auxiliary metadata for a MonitoredResource object. MonitoredResource objects contain the minimum set of information to uniquely identify a monitored resource instance. There is some other useful auxiliary metadata. Monitoring and Logging use an ingestion pipeline to extract metadata for cloud resources of all types, and store the metadata in this message. # Output only. Deprecated. Additional metadata about the monitored resource.Only k8s_container, k8s_pod, and k8s_node MonitoredResources have this field populated for GKE versions older than 1.12.6. For GKE versions 1.12.6 and above, the metadata field has been deprecated. The Kubernetes pod labels that used to be in metadata.userLabels will now be present in the labels field with a key prefix of k8s-pod/. The system labels that were present in the metadata.systemLabels field will no longer be available in the log entry.
         &quot;systemLabels&quot;: { # Output only. Values for predefined system metadata labels. System labels are a kind of metadata extracted by Google, including &quot;machine_image&quot;, &quot;vpc&quot;, &quot;subnet_id&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;, &quot;name&quot;, etc. System label values can be only strings, Boolean values, or a list of strings. For example: { &quot;name&quot;: &quot;my-test-instance&quot;, &quot;security_group&quot;: [&quot;a&quot;, &quot;b&quot;, &quot;c&quot;], &quot;spot_instance&quot;: false }
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html
index 953a284..f9cfe57 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.buckets.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
       &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
       &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
       &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
     },
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.logs.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.logs.html
index 870a383..fc6357f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.logs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.logs.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resourceNames=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the logs in projects, organizations, folders, or billing accounts. Only logs that have entries are listed.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
+  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
 
 Args:
   logName: string, Required. The resource name of the log to delete: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; [LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded. For example, &quot;projects/my-project-id/logs/syslog&quot;, &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. For more information about log names, see LogEntry. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
index 8f8923c..2de3204 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@
     { # Result returned from ListSinks.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there might be more results than appear in this response, then nextPageToken is included. To get the next set of results, call the same method again using the value of nextPageToken as pageToken.
   &quot;sinks&quot;: [ # A list of sinks.
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
       &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
         &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
         &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html
index 0c0d592..99d3134 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.locations.buckets.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
       &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
       &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
       &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
     },
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.logs.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.logs.html
index b399655..12b10dc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.logs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.logs.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resourceNames=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the logs in projects, organizations, folders, or billing accounts. Only logs that have entries are listed.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
+  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
 
 Args:
   logName: string, Required. The resource name of the log to delete: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; [LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded. For example, &quot;projects/my-project-id/logs/syslog&quot;, &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. For more information about log names, see LogEntry. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html
index e0bc4db..a46e18c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.buckets.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
       &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
       &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
       &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
     },
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.logs.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.logs.html
index b91be76..a74cd73 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.logs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.logs.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resourceNames=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the logs in projects, organizations, folders, or billing accounts. Only logs that have entries are listed.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
+  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
 
 Args:
   logName: string, Required. The resource name of the log to delete: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; [LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded. For example, &quot;projects/my-project-id/logs/syslog&quot;, &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. For more information about log names, see LogEntry. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
index b87e0a3..d232742 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@
     { # Result returned from ListSinks.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there might be more results than appear in this response, then nextPageToken is included. To get the next set of results, call the same method again using the value of nextPageToken as pageToken.
   &quot;sinks&quot;: [ # A list of sinks.
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
       &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
         &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
         &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html
index 5e7ea0e..88b4758 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.buckets.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
       &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
       &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
       &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
     },
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Describes this bucket.
   &quot;lifecycleState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The bucket lifecycle state.
   &quot;locked&quot;: True or False, # Whether the bucket has been locked. The retention period on a locked bucket may not be changed. Locked buckets may only be deleted if they are empty.
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id The supported locations are: &quot;global&quot;For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The resource name of the bucket. For example: &quot;projects/my-project-id/locations/my-location/buckets/my-bucket-id&quot; The supported locations are: global, us-central1, us-east1, us-west1, asia-east1, europe-west1.For the location of global it is unspecified where logs are actually stored. Once a bucket has been created, the location can not be changed.
   &quot;retentionDays&quot;: 42, # Logs will be retained by default for this amount of time, after which they will automatically be deleted. The minimum retention period is 1 day. If this value is set to zero at bucket creation time, the default time of 30 days will be used.
   &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the bucket.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.logs.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.logs.html
index f76704e..e67ddac 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.logs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.logs.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, resourceNames=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists the logs in projects, organizations, folders, or billing accounts. Only logs that have entries are listed.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(logName, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
+  <pre>Deletes all the log entries in a log for the _Default Log Bucket. The log reappears if it receives new entries. Log entries written shortly before the delete operation might not be deleted. Entries received after the delete operation with a timestamp before the operation will be deleted.
 
 Args:
   logName: string, Required. The resource name of the log to delete: &quot;projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; &quot;folders/[FOLDER_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]&quot; [LOG_ID] must be URL-encoded. For example, &quot;projects/my-project-id/logs/syslog&quot;, &quot;organizations/1234567890/logs/cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com%2Factivity&quot;. For more information about log names, see LogEntry. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.metrics.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.metrics.html
index f93f14c..d8e7c08 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.metrics.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.metrics.html
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
     &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
     &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
     &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
         &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
     &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
     &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name custom.googleapis.com or external.googleapis.com. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02KBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523KBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is KBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed..If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the value_type is INT64, DOUBLE, or DISTRIBUTION. The unit defines the representation of the stored metric values.Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of 0.02kBy might be displayed as 20By, and a value of 3523kBy might be displayed as 3.5MBy). However, if the unit is kBy, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed.If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an INT64 CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is s{CPU} (or equivalently 1s{CPU} or just s). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as 12005.Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a DOUBLE CUMULATIVE metric whose unit is ks{CPU}, and then write the value 12.005 (which is 12005/1000), or use Kis{CPU} and write 11.723 (which is 12005/1024).The supported units are a subset of The Unified Code for Units of Measure (https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard:Basic units (UNIT) bit bit By byte s second min minute h hour d day 1 dimensionlessPrefixes (PREFIX) k kilo (10^3) M mega (10^6) G giga (10^9) T tera (10^12) P peta (10^15) E exa (10^18) Z zetta (10^21) Y yotta (10^24) m milli (10^-3) u micro (10^-6) n nano (10^-9) p pico (10^-12) f femto (10^-15) a atto (10^-18) z zepto (10^-21) y yocto (10^-24) Ki kibi (2^10) Mi mebi (2^20) Gi gibi (2^30) Ti tebi (2^40) Pi pebi (2^50)GrammarThe grammar also includes these connectors: / division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, kBy/{email} or MiBy/10ms (although you should almost never have /s in a metric unit; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). . multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, GBy.d or k{watt}.h.The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: Annotation is just a comment if it follows a UNIT. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to 1. For examples, {request}/s == 1/s, By{transmitted}/s == By/s. NAME is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing { or }. 1 represents a unitary dimensionless unit (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in 1/s. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as 1/d or {new-users}/d (and a metric value 5 would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as 1000/d or k1/d or k{page_views}/d (and a metric value of 5.3 would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). % represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value 3 means &quot;3 percent&quot;). 10^2.% indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value 0.03 means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
     &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of metric_kind and value_type might not be supported.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The client-assigned metric identifier. Examples: &quot;error_count&quot;, &quot;nginx/requests&quot;.Metric identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the special characters _-.,+!*&#x27;,()%/. The forward-slash character (/) denotes a hierarchy of name pieces, and it cannot be the first character of the name.The metric identifier in this field must not be URL-encoded (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Percent-encoding). However, when the metric identifier appears as the [METRIC_ID] part of a metric_name API parameter, then the metric identifier must be URL-encoded. Example: &quot;projects/my-project/metrics/nginx%2Frequests&quot;.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
index 6ce9c07..e26e212 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@
     { # Result returned from ListSinks.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there might be more results than appear in this response, then nextPageToken is included. To get the next set of results, call the same method again using the value of nextPageToken as pageToken.
   &quot;sinks&quot;: [ # A list of sinks.
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
       &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
         &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
         &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
index 613be7b..cc15f37 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
     { # Result returned from ListSinks.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If there might be more results than appear in this response, then nextPageToken is included. To get the next set of results, call the same method again using the value of nextPageToken as pageToken.
   &quot;sinks&quot;: [ # A list of sinks.
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
       &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
         &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
         &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+{ # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, or a Cloud Pub/Sub topic. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
+    { # Describes a sink used to export log entries to one of the following destinations in any project: a Cloud Storage bucket, a BigQuery dataset, a Cloud Pub/Sub topic or a Cloud Logging Bucket. A logs filter controls which log entries are exported. The sink must be created within a project, organization, billing account, or folder.
   &quot;bigqueryOptions&quot;: { # Options that change functionality of a sink exporting data to BigQuery. # Optional. Options that affect sinks exporting data to BigQuery.
     &quot;usePartitionedTables&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Whether to use BigQuery&#x27;s partition tables (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/partitioned-tables). By default, Logging creates dated tables based on the log entries&#x27; timestamps, e.g. syslog_20170523. With partitioned tables the date suffix is no longer present and special query syntax (https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/querying-partitioned-tables) has to be used instead. In both cases, tables are sharded based on UTC timezone.
     &quot;usesTimestampColumnPartitioning&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if new timestamp column based partitioning is in use, false if legacy ingestion-time partitioning is in use. All new sinks will have this field set true and will use timestamp column based partitioning. If use_partitioned_tables is false, this value has no meaning and will be false. Legacy sinks using partitioned tables will have this field set to false.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/people_v1.contactGroups.html b/docs/dyn/people_v1.contactGroups.html
index e5e3a12..04ac990 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/people_v1.contactGroups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/people_v1.contactGroups.html
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
     { # The response for a specific contact group.
       &quot;contactGroup&quot;: { # A contact group. # The contact group.
         &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-          { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+          { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
             &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
             &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
           },
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@
 { # A request to create a new contact group.
   &quot;contactGroup&quot;: { # A contact group. # Required. The contact group to create.
     &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-      { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+      { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
         &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
         &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
       },
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@
 
     { # A contact group.
   &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
       &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
     },
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@
 
     { # A contact group.
   &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
       &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
     },
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@
   &quot;contactGroups&quot;: [ # The list of contact groups. Members of the contact groups are not populated.
     { # A contact group.
       &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-        { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+        { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
           &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
           &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
         },
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@
 { # A request to update an existing user contact group. All updated fields will be replaced.
   &quot;contactGroup&quot;: { # A contact group. # Required. The contact group to update.
     &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-      { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+      { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
         &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
         &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
       },
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@
 
     { # A contact group.
   &quot;clientData&quot;: [ # The group&#x27;s client data.
-    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed. LINT.IfChange(GroupClientData)
+    { # Arbitrary client data that is populated by clients. Duplicate keys and values are allowed.
       &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified key of the client data.
       &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The client specified value of the client data.
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.html
index 3e0b16d..2200054 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects()</a></code>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html
index 4d42f38..975c4d1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations()</a></code>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html
index 888432b..9574127 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html">catalogItems</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html">catalogItems</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
@@ -451,7 +451,7 @@
           &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
             &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
             &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-            &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+            &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
               { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
                 &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
                   &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
               },
             },
-            &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+            &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
           },
           &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
             &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html
index 721431e..47b0f97 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html">operations()</a></code>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html
index 6470d5d..251cb6e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html">operations</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.operations.html">operations</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html
index 86e559c..b3fe461 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html
@@ -72,14 +72,14 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html">placements</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.placements.html">placements</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#predict">predict(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Makes a recommendation prediction. If using API Key based authentication, the API Key must be registered using the PredictionApiKeyRegistry service. [Learn more](/recommendations-ai/docs/setting-up#register-key).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Makes a recommendation prediction. If using API Key based authentication, the API Key must be registered using the PredictionApiKeyRegistry service. [Learn more](https://cloud.google.com/recommendations-ai/docs/setting-up#register-key).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#predict_next">predict_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="predict">predict(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Makes a recommendation prediction. If using API Key based authentication, the API Key must be registered using the PredictionApiKeyRegistry service. [Learn more](/recommendations-ai/docs/setting-up#register-key).
+  <pre>Makes a recommendation prediction. If using API Key based authentication, the API Key must be registered using the PredictionApiKeyRegistry service. [Learn more](https://cloud.google.com/recommendations-ai/docs/setting-up#register-key).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Full resource name of the format: {name=projects/*/locations/global/catalogs/default_catalog/eventStores/default_event_store/placements/*} The id of the recommendation engine placement. This id is used to identify the set of models that will be used to make the prediction. We currently support three placements with the following IDs by default: * `shopping_cart`: Predicts items frequently bought together with one or more catalog items in the same shopping session. Commonly displayed after `add-to-cart` events, on product detail pages, or on the shopping cart page. * `home_page`: Predicts the next product that a user will most likely engage with or purchase based on the shopping or viewing history of the specified `userId` or `visitorId`. For example - Recommendations for you. * `product_detail`: Predicts the next product that a user will most likely engage with or purchase. The prediction is based on the shopping or viewing history of the specified `userId` or `visitorId` and its relevance to a specified `CatalogItem`. Typically used on product detail pages. For example - More items like this. * `recently_viewed_default`: Returns up to 75 items recently viewed by the specified `userId` or `visitorId`, most recent ones first. Returns nothing if neither of them has viewed any items yet. For example - Recently viewed. The full list of available placements can be seen at https://console.cloud.google.com/recommendation/datafeeds/default_catalog/dashboard (required)
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@
     &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
       &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
       &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-      &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+      &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
         { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
           &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
             &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@
           &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
         },
       },
-      &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+      &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
     },
     &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
       &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html
index eb60fec..9812564 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html">predictionApiKeyRegistrations</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.predictionApiKeyRegistrations.html">predictionApiKeyRegistrations</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html
index 3f015ad..f337eca 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html">userEvents</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.html">eventStores</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.eventStores.userEvents.html">userEvents</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@
           &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
             &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
             &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-            &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+            &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
               { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
                 &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
                   &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
               },
             },
-            &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+            &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
           },
           &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
             &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@
       &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
         &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
         &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-        &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+        &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
           { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
             &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
               &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@
             &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
           },
         },
-        &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+        &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
       },
       &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
         &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
@@ -595,7 +595,7 @@
   &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
     &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
     &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-    &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+    &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
       { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
         &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
           &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@
         &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
       },
     },
-    &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+    &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
   },
   &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
     &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
@@ -691,7 +691,7 @@
   &quot;productEventDetail&quot;: { # ProductEventDetail captures user event information specific to retail products. # Optional. Retail product specific user event metadata. This field is required for the following event types: * `add-to-cart` * `add-to-list` * `category-page-view` * `checkout-start` * `detail-page-view` * `purchase-complete` * `refund` * `remove-from-cart` * `remove-from-list` * `search` This field is optional for the following event types: * `page-visit` * `shopping-cart-page-view` - note that &#x27;product_event_detail&#x27; should be set for this unless the shopping cart is empty. This field is not allowed for the following event types: * `home-page-view`
     &quot;cartId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The id or name of the associated shopping cart. This id is used to associate multiple items added or present in the cart before purchase. This can only be set for `add-to-cart`, `remove-from-cart`, `checkout-start`, `purchase-complete`, or `shopping-cart-page-view` events.
     &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `add-to-list` and `remove-from-list` events. The id or name of the list that the item is being added to or removed from. Other event types should not set this field.
-    &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
+    &quot;pageCategories&quot;: [ # Required for `category-page-view` events. At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The categories associated with a category page. Category pages include special pages such as sales or promotions. For instance, a special sale page may have the category hierarchy: categories : [&quot;Sales&quot;, &quot;2017 Black Friday Deals&quot;].
       { # Category represents catalog item category hierarchy.
         &quot;categories&quot;: [ # Required. Catalog item categories. Each category should be a UTF-8 encoded string with a length limit of 2 KiB. Note that the order in the list denotes the specificity (from least to most specific).
           &quot;A String&quot;,
@@ -736,7 +736,7 @@
         &quot;a_key&quot;: 3.14,
       },
     },
-    &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
+    &quot;searchQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # At least one of search_query or page_categories is required for `search` events. Other event types should not set this field. The user&#x27;s search query as UTF-8 encoded text with a length limit of 5 KiB.
   },
   &quot;userInfo&quot;: { # Information of end users. # Required. User information.
     &quot;directUserRequest&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the request is made directly from the end user in which case the user_agent and ip_address fields can be populated from the HTTP request. This should *not* be set when using the javascript pixel. This flag should be set only if the API request is made directly from the end user such as a mobile app (and not if a gateway or a server is processing and pushing the user events).
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html
index 882f9f4..85e3aa4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.catalogItems.html">catalogItems()</a></code>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html
index d345de6..eb91e79 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html">operations</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.operations.html">operations</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
index 5ae0cc0..3a760e2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 
 </style>
 
-<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a></h1>
+<h1><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.html">Recommendations AI (Beta)</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.html">locations</a></h1>
 <h2>Instance Methods</h2>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="recommendationengine_v1beta1.projects.locations.catalogs.html">catalogs()</a></code>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index bdbdc52..3e106fb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index ac6762e..68471ec 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index 40bb2b8..0959136 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index d9cb7a9..d66b26b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index 188e32e..0e0a5f7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.billingAccounts.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index a2a7760..6c762ba 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.folders.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index c3990c1..29db5e8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.organizations.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
index 94cfee1..23c4f72 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recommender_v1beta1.projects.locations.recommenders.recommendations.html
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
                 &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
                 },
-                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+                &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
                   &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                     &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
                   },
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
             &quot;pathFilters&quot;: { # Set of filters to apply if `path` refers to array elements or nested array elements in order to narrow down to a single unique element that is being tested/modified. This is intended to be an exact match per filter. To perform advanced matching, use path_value_matchers. * Example: { &quot;/versions/*/name&quot; : &quot;it-123&quot; &quot;/versions/*/targetSize/percent&quot;: 20 } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/condition&quot; : null } * Example: { &quot;/bindings/*/role&quot;: &quot;roles/owner&quot; &quot;/bindings/*/members/*&quot; : [&quot;x@example.com&quot;, &quot;y@example.com&quot;] } When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
             },
-            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field referes to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
+            &quot;pathValueMatchers&quot;: { # Similar to path_filters, this contains set of filters to apply if `path` field refers to array elements. This is meant to support value matching beyond exact match. To perform exact match, use path_filters. When both path_filters and path_value_matchers are set, an implicit AND must be performed.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains various matching options for values for a GCP resource field.
                 &quot;matchesPattern&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # To be used for full regex matching. The regular expression is using the Google RE2 syntax (https://github.com/google/re2/wiki/Syntax), so to be used with RE2::FullMatch
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
index 0ee0092..19ca7f2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1.projects.locations.instances.html
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
   &quot;redisConfigs&quot;: { # Optional. Redis configuration parameters, according to http://redis.io/topics/config. Currently, the only supported parameters are: Redis version 3.2 and newer: * maxmemory-policy * notify-keyspace-events Redis version 4.0 and newer: * activedefrag * lfu-decay-time * lfu-log-factor * maxmemory-gb Redis version 5.0 and newer: * stream-node-max-bytes * stream-node-max-entries
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility
+  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility * `REDIS_6_0` for Redis 6.0 compatibility
   &quot;reservedIpRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The CIDR range of internal addresses that are reserved for this instance. If not provided, the service will choose an unused /29 block, for example, 10.0.0.0/29 or 192.168.0.0/29. Ranges must be unique and non-overlapping with existing subnets in an authorized network.
   &quot;serverCaCerts&quot;: [ # Output only. List of server CA certificates for the instance.
     { # TlsCertificate Resource
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }
 
   instanceId: string, Required. The logical name of the Redis instance in the customer project with the following restrictions: * Must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. * Must start with a letter. * Must be between 1-40 characters. * Must end with a number or a letter. * Must be unique within the customer project / location
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@
   &quot;redisConfigs&quot;: { # Optional. Redis configuration parameters, according to http://redis.io/topics/config. Currently, the only supported parameters are: Redis version 3.2 and newer: * maxmemory-policy * notify-keyspace-events Redis version 4.0 and newer: * activedefrag * lfu-decay-time * lfu-log-factor * maxmemory-gb Redis version 5.0 and newer: * stream-node-max-bytes * stream-node-max-entries
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility
+  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility * `REDIS_6_0` for Redis 6.0 compatibility
   &quot;reservedIpRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The CIDR range of internal addresses that are reserved for this instance. If not provided, the service will choose an unused /29 block, for example, 10.0.0.0/29 or 192.168.0.0/29. Ranges must be unique and non-overlapping with existing subnets in an authorized network.
   &quot;serverCaCerts&quot;: [ # Output only. List of server CA certificates for the instance.
     { # TlsCertificate Resource
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@
       &quot;redisConfigs&quot;: { # Optional. Redis configuration parameters, according to http://redis.io/topics/config. Currently, the only supported parameters are: Redis version 3.2 and newer: * maxmemory-policy * notify-keyspace-events Redis version 4.0 and newer: * activedefrag * lfu-decay-time * lfu-log-factor * maxmemory-gb Redis version 5.0 and newer: * stream-node-max-bytes * stream-node-max-entries
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility
+      &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility * `REDIS_6_0` for Redis 6.0 compatibility
       &quot;reservedIpRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The CIDR range of internal addresses that are reserved for this instance. If not provided, the service will choose an unused /29 block, for example, 10.0.0.0/29 or 192.168.0.0/29. Ranges must be unique and non-overlapping with existing subnets in an authorized network.
       &quot;serverCaCerts&quot;: [ # Output only. List of server CA certificates for the instance.
         { # TlsCertificate Resource
@@ -484,7 +484,7 @@
       &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
       &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
       &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-      &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+      &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
     },
   ],
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
@@ -537,7 +537,7 @@
   &quot;redisConfigs&quot;: { # Optional. Redis configuration parameters, according to http://redis.io/topics/config. Currently, the only supported parameters are: Redis version 3.2 and newer: * maxmemory-policy * notify-keyspace-events Redis version 4.0 and newer: * activedefrag * lfu-decay-time * lfu-log-factor * maxmemory-gb Redis version 5.0 and newer: * stream-node-max-bytes * stream-node-max-entries
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility
+  &quot;redisVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The version of Redis software. If not provided, latest supported version will be used. Currently, the supported values are: * `REDIS_3_2` for Redis 3.2 compatibility * `REDIS_4_0` for Redis 4.0 compatibility (default) * `REDIS_5_0` for Redis 5.0 compatibility * `REDIS_6_0` for Redis 6.0 compatibility
   &quot;reservedIpRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The CIDR range of internal addresses that are reserved for this instance. If not provided, the service will choose an unused /29 block, for example, 10.0.0.0/29 or 192.168.0.0/29. Ranges must be unique and non-overlapping with existing subnets in an authorized network.
   &quot;serverCaCerts&quot;: [ # Output only. List of server CA certificates for the instance.
     { # TlsCertificate Resource
@@ -551,7 +551,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Required. Mask of fields to update. At least one path must be supplied in this field. The elements of the repeated paths field may only include these fields from Instance: * `displayName` * `labels` * `memorySizeGb` * `redisConfig`
diff --git a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
index 31c20bc..b8ca57f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/redis_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }
 
   instanceId: string, Required. The logical name of the Redis instance in the customer project with the following restrictions: * Must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. * Must start with a letter. * Must be between 1-40 characters. * Must end with a number or a letter. * Must be unique within the customer project / location
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -484,7 +484,7 @@
       &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
       &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
       &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-      &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+      &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
     },
   ],
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
@@ -551,7 +551,7 @@
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this instance.
   &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this instance, if available.
   &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The service tier of the instance.
-  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The In-transit encryption mode of Redis instance. If not provided, in-transit encryption is disabled for instance.
+  &quot;transitEncryptionMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The TLS mode of the Redis instance. If not provided, TLS is disabled for the instance.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Required. Mask of fields to update. At least one path must be supplied in this field. The elements of the repeated paths field may only include these fields from Instance: * `displayName` * `labels` * `memorySizeGb` * `redisConfig`
diff --git a/docs/dyn/script_v1.scripts.html b/docs/dyn/script_v1.scripts.html
index a02bdb5..7bbf090 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/script_v1.scripts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/script_v1.scripts.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#run">run(scriptId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Runs a function in an Apps Script project. The script project must be deployed for use with the Apps Script API and the calling application must share the same Cloud Platform project. This method requires authorization with an OAuth 2.0 token that includes at least one of the scopes listed in the [Authorization](#authorization-scopes) section; script projects that do not require authorization cannot be executed through this API. To find the correct scopes to include in the authentication token, open the project in the script editor, then select **File > Project properties** and click the **Scopes** tab. The error `403, PERMISSION_DENIED: The caller does not have permission` indicates that the Cloud Platform project used to authorize the request is not the same as the one used by the script.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Runs a function in an Apps Script project. The script project must be deployed for use with the Apps Script API and the calling application must share the same Cloud Platform project. This method requires authorization with an OAuth 2.0 token that includes at least one of the scopes listed in the [Authorization](#authorization-scopes) section; script projects that do not require authorization cannot be executed through this API. To find the correct scopes to include in the authentication token, open the script project **Overview** page and scroll down to "Project OAuth Scopes." The error `403, PERMISSION_DENIED: The caller does not have permission` indicates that the Cloud Platform project used to authorize the request is not the same as the one used by the script.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="run">run(scriptId, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Runs a function in an Apps Script project. The script project must be deployed for use with the Apps Script API and the calling application must share the same Cloud Platform project. This method requires authorization with an OAuth 2.0 token that includes at least one of the scopes listed in the [Authorization](#authorization-scopes) section; script projects that do not require authorization cannot be executed through this API. To find the correct scopes to include in the authentication token, open the project in the script editor, then select **File &gt; Project properties** and click the **Scopes** tab. The error `403, PERMISSION_DENIED: The caller does not have permission` indicates that the Cloud Platform project used to authorize the request is not the same as the one used by the script.
+  <pre>Runs a function in an Apps Script project. The script project must be deployed for use with the Apps Script API and the calling application must share the same Cloud Platform project. This method requires authorization with an OAuth 2.0 token that includes at least one of the scopes listed in the [Authorization](#authorization-scopes) section; script projects that do not require authorization cannot be executed through this API. To find the correct scopes to include in the authentication token, open the script project **Overview** page and scroll down to &quot;Project OAuth Scopes.&quot; The error `403, PERMISSION_DENIED: The caller does not have permission` indicates that the Cloud Platform project used to authorize the request is not the same as the one used by the script.
 
 Args:
-  scriptId: string, The script ID of the script to be executed. To find the script ID, open the project in the script editor and select **File &gt; Project properties**. (required)
+  scriptId: string, The script ID of the script to be executed. Find the script ID on the **Project settings** page under &quot;IDs.&quot; (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a1cef1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the projects Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</code>
+  <pre>Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+
+        Args:
+          callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
+            form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
+            request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
+            third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
+            error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
+            occurred.
+
+        Returns:
+          A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+        </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1320135
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.html
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html">locations()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the locations Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef3818e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html">namespaces()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the namespaces Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets information about a location.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists information about the supported locations for this service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets information about a location.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Resource name for the location. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A resource that represents Google Cloud Platform location.
+  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, &quot;Tokyo&quot;.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {&quot;cloud.googleapis.com/region&quot;: &quot;us-east1&quot;}
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;locationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The canonical id for this location. For example: `&quot;us-east1&quot;`.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `&quot;projects/example-project/locations/us-east1&quot;`
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists information about the supported locations for this service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required)
+  filter: string, The standard list filter.
+  pageSize: integer, The standard list page size.
+  pageToken: string, The standard list page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Locations.ListLocations.
+  &quot;locations&quot;: [ # A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # A resource that represents Google Cloud Platform location.
+      &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, &quot;Tokyo&quot;.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {&quot;cloud.googleapis.com/region&quot;: &quot;us-east1&quot;}
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;locationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The canonical id for this location. For example: `&quot;us-east1&quot;`.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `&quot;projects/example-project/locations/us-east1&quot;`
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The standard List next-page token.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..140ae93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html
@@ -0,0 +1,400 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html">namespaces</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html">services()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the services Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, namespaceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a namespace, and returns the new namespace.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes a namespace. This also deletes all services and endpoints in the namespace.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets a namespace.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists all namespaces.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates a namespace.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Sets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Tests IAM permissions for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, namespaceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates a namespace, and returns the new namespace.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the project and location the namespace will be created in. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+}
+
+  namespaceId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes a namespace. This also deletes all services and endpoints in the namespace.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the namespace to delete. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets a namespace.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the namespace to retrieve. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `GetIamPolicy` method.
+  &quot;options&quot;: { # Encapsulates settings provided to GetIamPolicy. # OPTIONAL: A `GetPolicyOptions` object for specifying options to `GetIamPolicy`.
+    &quot;requestedPolicyVersion&quot;: 42, # Optional. The policy format version to be returned. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional bindings must specify version 3. Policies without any conditional bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists all namespaces.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the project and location whose namespaces you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name` or `labels.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `labels.owner` returns namespaces that have a label with the key `owner`, this is the same as `labels:owner` * `labels.owner=sd` returns namespaces that have key/value `owner=sd` * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/namespace-c` returns namespaces that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;namespace-e&quot; is returned but &quot;namespace-a&quot; is not * `labels.owner!=sd AND labels.foo=bar` returns namespaces that have `owner` in label key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that namespace doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any namespaces, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows value: `name` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for RegistrationService.ListNamespaces.
+  &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The list of namespaces.
+    { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Updates a namespace.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Sets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being specified. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.
+  &quot;policy&quot;: { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the `resource`. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is a valid policy but certain Cloud Platform services (such as Projects) might reject them.
+    &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+      { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+        &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+          &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+          &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+          &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+        },
+        &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+    &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Tests IAM permissions for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy detail is being requested. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The set of permissions to check for the `resource`. Permissions with wildcards (such as &#x27;*&#x27; or &#x27;storage.*&#x27;) are not allowed. For more information see [IAM Overview](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/overview#permissions).
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d663c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html">namespaces</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html">services</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html">endpoints</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, endpointId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an endpoint, and returns the new endpoint.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes an endpoint.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets an endpoint.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists all endpoints.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates an endpoint.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, endpointId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates an endpoint, and returns the new endpoint.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the service that this endpoint provides. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+}
+
+  endpointId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes an endpoint.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the endpoint to delete. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets an endpoint.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the endpoint to get. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists all endpoints.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the service whose endpoints you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name`, `address`, `port`, or `annotations.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `annotations.owner` returns endpoints that have a annotation with the key `owner`, this is the same as `annotations:owner` * `annotations.protocol=gRPC` returns endpoints that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `address=192.108.1.105` returns endpoints that have this address * `port&gt;8080` returns endpoints that have port number larger than 8080 * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/my-service/endpoints/endpoint-c` returns endpoints that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;endpoint-e&quot; is returned but &quot;endpoint-a&quot; is not * `annotations.owner!=sd AND annotations.foo=bar` returns endpoints that have `owner` in annotation key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that endpoint doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any endpoints, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows values: `name`, `address`, `port` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # The list of endpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Updates an endpoint.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff6012f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html
@@ -0,0 +1,505 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="servicedirectory_v1.html">Service Directory API</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.html">namespaces</a> . <a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html">services</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="servicedirectory_v1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html">endpoints()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the endpoints Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, serviceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a service, and returns the new service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes a service. This also deletes all endpoints associated with the service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets a service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists all services belonging to a namespace.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates a service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#resolve">resolve(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns a service and its associated endpoints. Resolving a service is not considered an active developer method.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Sets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Tests IAM permissions for a resource (namespace or service only).</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, serviceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates a service, and returns the new service.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the namespace this service will belong to. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+}
+
+  serviceId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes a service. This also deletes all endpoints associated with the service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the service to delete. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets a service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the service to get. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being requested. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `GetIamPolicy` method.
+  &quot;options&quot;: { # Encapsulates settings provided to GetIamPolicy. # OPTIONAL: A `GetPolicyOptions` object for specifying options to `GetIamPolicy`.
+    &quot;requestedPolicyVersion&quot;: 42, # Optional. The policy format version to be returned. Valid values are 0, 1, and 3. Requests specifying an invalid value will be rejected. Requests for policies with any conditional bindings must specify version 3. Policies without any conditional bindings may specify any valid value or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists all services belonging to a namespace.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the namespace whose services you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name` or `annotations.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `annotations.owner` returns services that have a annotation with the key `owner`, this is the same as `annotations:owner` * `annotations.protocol=gRPC` returns services that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/service-c` returns services that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;service-e&quot; is returned but &quot;service-a&quot; is not * `annotations.owner!=sd AND annotations.foo=bar` returns services that have `owner` in annotation key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that service doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any services, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows value: `name` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for RegistrationService.ListServices.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
+  &quot;services&quot;: [ # The list of services.
+    { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+        { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+          &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+          &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+          },
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+          &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+    },
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Updates a service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+  &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="resolve">resolve(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Returns a service and its associated endpoints. Resolving a service is not considered an active developer method.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the service to resolve. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The request message for LookupService.ResolveService. Looks up a service by its name, returns the service and its endpoints.
+  &quot;endpointFilter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The filter applied to the endpoints of the resolved service. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name`, `address`, `port`, or `annotations.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `annotations.owner` returns endpoints that have a annotation with the key `owner`, this is the same as `annotations:owner` * `annotations.protocol=gRPC` returns endpoints that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `address=192.108.1.105` returns endpoints that have this address * `port&gt;8080` returns endpoints that have port number larger than 8080 * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/my-service/endpoints/endpoint-c` returns endpoints that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;endpoint-e&quot; is returned but &quot;endpoint-a&quot; is not * `annotations.owner!=sd AND annotations.foo=bar` returns endpoints that have `owner` in annotation key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that endpoint doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any endpoint, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  &quot;maxEndpoints&quot;: 42, # Optional. The maximum number of endpoints to return. Defaults to 25. Maximum is 100. If a value less than one is specified, the Default is used. If a value greater than the Maximum is specified, the Maximum is used.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for LookupService.ResolveService.
+  &quot;service&quot;: { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
+    &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+      &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+    },
+    &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+      { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
+        &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+        &quot;annotations&quot;: { # Optional. Annotations for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire annotations dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Annotations that go beyond this limit are rejected * Valid annotation keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/) Annotations that fails to meet these requirements are rejected. * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system annotations managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `metadata` field in the v1beta1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+        },
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+        &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Sets the IAM Policy for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy is being specified. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `SetIamPolicy` method.
+  &quot;policy&quot;: { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the `resource`. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is a valid policy but certain Cloud Platform services (such as Projects) might reject them.
+    &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+      { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+        &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+          &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+          &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+          &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+        },
+        &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+    &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) - etag: BwWWja0YfJA= - version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Tests IAM permissions for a resource (namespace or service only).
+
+Args:
+  resource: string, REQUIRED: The resource for which the policy detail is being requested. See the operation documentation for the appropriate value for this field. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The set of permissions to check for the `resource`. Permissions with wildcards (such as &#x27;*&#x27; or &#x27;storage.*&#x27;) are not allowed. For more information see [IAM Overview](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/overview#permissions).
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for `TestIamPermissions` method.
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.html
index 92cc361..3b57c1f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.html
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, namespaceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a namespace, and returns the new Namespace.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a namespace, and returns the new namespace.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a namespace. This also deletes all services and endpoints in the namespace.</p>
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, namespaceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a namespace, and returns the new Namespace.
+  <pre>Creates a namespace, and returns the new namespace.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the project and location the namespace will be created in. (required)
@@ -125,10 +125,10 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
 }
 
   namespaceId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -181,10 +181,10 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -236,9 +236,9 @@
   <pre>Lists all namespaces.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the project and location whose namespaces we&#x27;d like to list. (required)
-  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list result by. General filter string syntax: () can be &quot;name&quot;, or &quot;labels.&quot; for map field. can be &quot;&lt;, &gt;, &lt;=, &gt;=, !=, =, :&quot;. Of which &quot;:&quot; means HAS, and is roughly the same as &quot;=&quot;. must be the same data type as field. can be &quot;AND, OR, NOT&quot;. Examples of valid filters: * &quot;labels.owner&quot; returns Namespaces that have a label with the key &quot;owner&quot; this is the same as &quot;labels:owner&quot;. * &quot;labels.protocol=gRPC&quot; returns Namespaces that have key/value &quot;protocol=gRPC&quot;. * &quot;name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east/namespaces/namespace-c&quot; returns Namespaces that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;namespace-e&quot; will be returned but &quot;namespace-a&quot; will not be. * &quot;labels.owner!=sd AND labels.foo=bar&quot; returns Namespaces that have &quot;owner&quot; in label key but value is not &quot;sd&quot; AND have key/value foo=bar. * &quot;doesnotexist.foo=bar&quot; returns an empty list. Note that Namespace doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any Namespaces, it returns no results.
-  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list result by. General order by string syntax: () (,) allows values {&quot;name&quot;} ascending or descending order by . If this is left blank, &quot;asc&quot; is used. Note that an empty order_by string result in default order, which is order by name in ascending order.
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the project and location whose namespaces you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name` or `labels.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `labels.owner` returns namespaces that have a label with the key `owner`, this is the same as `labels:owner` * `labels.owner=sd` returns namespaces that have key/value `owner=sd` * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/namespace-c` returns namespaces that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;namespace-e&quot; is returned but &quot;namespace-a&quot; is not * `labels.owner!=sd AND labels.foo=bar` returns namespaces that have `owner` in label key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that namespace doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any namespaces, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows value: `name` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -252,10 +252,10 @@
     { # The response message for RegistrationService.ListNamespaces.
   &quot;namespaces&quot;: [ # The list of namespaces.
     { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
     },
   ],
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
@@ -281,15 +281,15 @@
   <pre>Updates a namespace.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;. (required)
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
@@ -302,10 +302,10 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # A container for services. Namespaces allow administrators to group services together and define permissions for a collection of services.
-  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this Namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels associated with this namespace. No more than 64 user labels can be associated with a given resource. Label keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the namespace in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html
index fec7536..aca4a6c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.endpoints.html
@@ -79,13 +79,13 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, endpointId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a endpoint, and returns the new Endpoint.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an endpoint, and returns the new endpoint.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes a endpoint.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes an endpoint.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Gets a endpoint.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets an endpoint.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Lists all endpoints.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates a endpoint.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates an endpoint.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, endpointId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a endpoint, and returns the new Endpoint.
+  <pre>Creates an endpoint, and returns the new endpoint.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the service that this endpoint provides. (required)
@@ -111,12 +111,12 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
 }
 
   endpointId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
@@ -129,18 +129,18 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes a endpoint.
+  <pre>Deletes an endpoint.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the endpoint to delete. (required)
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Gets a endpoint.
+  <pre>Gets an endpoint.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the endpoint to get. (required)
@@ -171,12 +171,12 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -185,9 +185,9 @@
   <pre>Lists all endpoints.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the service whose endpoints we&#x27;d like to list. (required)
-  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list result by. General filter string syntax: () can be &quot;name&quot;, &quot;address&quot;, &quot;port&quot; or &quot;metadata.&quot; for map field. can be &quot;&lt;, &gt;, &lt;=, &gt;=, !=, =, :&quot;. Of which &quot;:&quot; means HAS, and is roughly the same as &quot;=&quot;. must be the same data type as field. can be &quot;AND, OR, NOT&quot;. Examples of valid filters: * &quot;metadata.owner&quot; returns Endpoints that have a label with the key &quot;owner&quot; this is the same as &quot;metadata:owner&quot;. * &quot;metadata.protocol=gRPC&quot; returns Endpoints that have key/value &quot;protocol=gRPC&quot;. * &quot;address=192.108.1.105&quot; returns Endpoints that have this address. * &quot;port&gt;8080&quot; returns Endpoints that have port number larger than 8080. * &quot;name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east/namespaces/my-namespace/services/my-service/endpoints/endpoint-c&quot; returns Endpoints that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;endpoint-e&quot; will be returned but &quot;endpoint-a&quot; will not be. * &quot;metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar&quot; returns Endpoints that have &quot;owner&quot; in label key but value is not &quot;sd&quot; AND have key/value foo=bar. * &quot;doesnotexist.foo=bar&quot; returns an empty list. Note that Endpoint doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any Endpoints, it returns no results.
-  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list result by.
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the service whose endpoints you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name`, `address`, `port`, or `metadata.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `metadata.owner` returns endpoints that have a metadata with the key `owner`, this is the same as `metadata:owner` * `metadata.protocol=gRPC` returns endpoints that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `address=192.108.1.105` returns endpoints that have this address * `port&gt;8080` returns endpoints that have port number larger than 8080 * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/my-service/endpoints/endpoint-c` returns endpoints that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;endpoint-e&quot; is returned but &quot;endpoint-a&quot; is not * `metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar` returns endpoints that have `owner` in metadata key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that endpoint doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any endpoints, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows values: `name`, `address`, `port` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -201,12 +201,12 @@
     { # The response message for RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
   &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # The list of endpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
@@ -229,20 +229,20 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates a endpoint.
+  <pre>Updates an endpoint.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;. (required)
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
@@ -255,12 +255,12 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+  &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html
index 3858f4c..88e87e2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicedirectory_v1beta1.projects.locations.namespaces.services.html
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, serviceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a service, and returns the new Service.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a service, and returns the new service.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a service. This also deletes all endpoints associated with the service.</p>
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, serviceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a service, and returns the new Service.
+  <pre>Creates a service, and returns the new service.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the namespace this service will belong to. (required)
@@ -128,20 +128,20 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
 }
 
   serviceId: string, Required. The Resource ID must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
@@ -154,20 +154,20 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -204,20 +204,20 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -269,9 +269,9 @@
   <pre>Lists all services belonging to a namespace.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the namespace whose services we&#x27;d like to list. (required)
-  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list result by. General filter string syntax: () can be &quot;name&quot;, or &quot;metadata.&quot; for map field. can be &quot;&lt;, &gt;, &lt;=, &gt;=, !=, =, :&quot;. Of which &quot;:&quot; means HAS, and is roughly the same as &quot;=&quot;. must be the same data type as field. can be &quot;AND, OR, NOT&quot;. Examples of valid filters: * &quot;metadata.owner&quot; returns Services that have a label with the key &quot;owner&quot; this is the same as &quot;metadata:owner&quot;. * &quot;metadata.protocol=gRPC&quot; returns Services that have key/value &quot;protocol=gRPC&quot;. * &quot;name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east/namespaces/my-namespace/services/service-c&quot; returns Services that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;service-e&quot; will be returned but &quot;service-a&quot; will not be. * &quot;metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar&quot; returns Services that have &quot;owner&quot; in label key but value is not &quot;sd&quot; AND have key/value foo=bar. * &quot;doesnotexist.foo=bar&quot; returns an empty list. Note that Service doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any Services, it returns no results.
-  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list result by.
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the namespace whose services you&#x27;d like to list. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. The filter to list results by. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name` or `metadata.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `metadata.owner` returns services that have a metadata with the key `owner`, this is the same as `metadata:owner` * `metadata.protocol=gRPC` returns services that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/service-c` returns services that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;service-e&quot; is returned but &quot;service-a&quot; is not * `metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar` returns services that have `owner` in metadata key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that service doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any services, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
+  orderBy: string, Optional. The order to list results by. General `order_by` string syntax: ` () (,)` * `` allows value: `name` * `` ascending or descending order by ``. If this is left blank, `asc` is used Note that an empty `order_by` string results in default order, which is order by `name` in ascending order.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return.
   pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -286,20 +286,20 @@
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
   &quot;services&quot;: [ # The list of services.
     { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-      &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+      &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
         { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-          &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-          &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+          &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+          &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
           },
-          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-          &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+          &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
         },
       ],
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
     },
   ],
 }</pre>
@@ -324,25 +324,25 @@
   <pre>Updates a service.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;. (required)
+  name: string, Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
 }
 
   updateMask: string, Required. List of fields to be updated in this request.
@@ -355,20 +355,20 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+  &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
     { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+      &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
       },
-      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+      &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
   },
-  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # The request message for LookupService.ResolveService. Looks up a service by its name, returns the service and its endpoints.
-  &quot;endpointFilter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The filter applied to the endpoints of the resolved service. General filter string syntax: () can be &quot;name&quot; or &quot;metadata.&quot; for map field. can be &quot;&lt;, &gt;, &lt;=, &gt;=, !=, =, :&quot;. Of which &quot;:&quot; means HAS and is roughly the same as &quot;=&quot;. must be the same data type as the field. can be &quot;AND, OR, NOT&quot;. Examples of valid filters: * &quot;metadata.owner&quot; returns Endpoints that have a label with the key &quot;owner&quot;, this is the same as &quot;metadata:owner&quot; * &quot;metadata.protocol=gRPC&quot; returns Endpoints that have key/value &quot;protocol=gRPC&quot; * &quot;metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar&quot; returns Endpoints that have &quot;owner&quot; field in metadata with a value that is not &quot;sd&quot; AND have the key/value foo=bar.
+  &quot;endpointFilter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The filter applied to the endpoints of the resolved service. General `filter` string syntax: ` ()` * `` can be `name`, `address`, `port`, or `metadata.` for map field * `` can be `&lt;`, `&gt;`, `&lt;=`, `&gt;=`, `!=`, `=`, `:`. Of which `:` means `HAS`, and is roughly the same as `=` * `` must be the same data type as field * `` can be `AND`, `OR`, `NOT` Examples of valid filters: * `metadata.owner` returns endpoints that have a annotation with the key `owner`, this is the same as `metadata:owner` * `metadata.protocol=gRPC` returns endpoints that have key/value `protocol=gRPC` * `address=192.108.1.105` returns endpoints that have this address * `port&gt;8080` returns endpoints that have port number larger than 8080 * `name&gt;projects/my-project/locations/us-east1/namespaces/my-namespace/services/my-service/endpoints/endpoint-c` returns endpoints that have name that is alphabetically later than the string, so &quot;endpoint-e&quot; is returned but &quot;endpoint-a&quot; is not * `metadata.owner!=sd AND metadata.foo=bar` returns endpoints that have `owner` in annotation key but value is not `sd` AND have key/value `foo=bar` * `doesnotexist.foo=bar` returns an empty list. Note that endpoint doesn&#x27;t have a field called &quot;doesnotexist&quot;. Since the filter does not match any endpoint, it returns no results For more information about filtering, see [API Filtering](https://aip.dev/160).
   &quot;maxEndpoints&quot;: 42, # Optional. The maximum number of endpoints to return. Defaults to 25. Maximum is 100. If a value less than one is specified, the Default is used. If a value greater than the Maximum is specified, the Maximum is used.
 }
 
@@ -396,20 +396,20 @@
 
     { # The response message for LookupService.ResolveService.
   &quot;service&quot;: { # An individual service. A service contains a name and optional metadata. A service must exist before endpoints can be added to it.
-    &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.Resolve. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
+    &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Output only. Endpoints associated with this service. Returned on LookupService.ResolveService. Control plane clients should use RegistrationService.ListEndpoints.
       { # An individual endpoint that provides a service. The service must already exist to create an endpoint.
-        &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory will reject bad addresses like: &quot;8.8.8&quot; &quot;8.8.8.8:53&quot; &quot;test:bad:address&quot; &quot;[::1]&quot; &quot;[::1]:8080&quot; Limited to 45 characters.
-        &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+        &quot;address&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An IPv4 or IPv6 address. Service Directory rejects bad addresses like: * `8.8.8` * `8.8.8.8:53` * `test:bad:address` * `[::1]` * `[::1]:8080` Limited to 45 characters.
+        &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the endpoint. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
-        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*&#x27;.
-        &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory will reject values outside of [0, 65535].
+        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the endpoint in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*/endpoints/*`.
+        &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Optional. Service Directory rejects values outside of `[0, 65535]`.
       },
     ],
-    &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: - The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 2000 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond any these limits will be rejected. - Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements will be rejected. - The &#x27;(*.)google.com/&#x27; and &#x27;(*.)googleapis.com/&#x27; prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries will be silently ignored by the system.
+    &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Optional. Metadata for the service. This data can be consumed by service clients. Restrictions: * The entire metadata dictionary may contain up to 512 characters, spread accoss all key-value pairs. Metadata that goes beyond this limit are rejected * Valid metadata keys have two segments: an optional prefix and name, separated by a slash (/). The name segment is required and must be 63 characters or less, beginning and ending with an alphanumeric character ([a-z0-9A-Z]) with dashes (-), underscores (_), dots (.), and alphanumerics between. The prefix is optional. If specified, the prefix must be a DNS subdomain: a series of DNS labels separated by dots (.), not longer than 253 characters in total, followed by a slash (/). Metadata that fails to meet these requirements are rejected * The `(*.)google.com/` and `(*.)googleapis.com/` prefixes are reserved for system metadata managed by Service Directory. If the user tries to write to these keyspaces, those entries are silently ignored by the system Note: This field is equivalent to the `annotations` field in the v1 API. They have the same syntax and read/write to the same location in Service Directory.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
     },
-    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format &#x27;projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*&#x27;.
+    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name for the service in the format `projects/*/locations/*/namespaces/*/services/*`.
   },
 }</pre>
 </div>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.configs.html b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.configs.html
index c2434fa..35f7a09 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.configs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.configs.html
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service config_version: 3 name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
+{ # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
   &quot;apis&quot;: [ # A list of API interfaces exported by this service. Only the `name` field of the google.protobuf.Api needs to be provided by the configuration author, as the remaining fields will be derived from the IDL during the normalization process. It is an error to specify an API interface here which cannot be resolved against the associated IDL files.
     { # Api is a light-weight descriptor for an API Interface. Interfaces are also described as &quot;protocol buffer services&quot; in some contexts, such as by the &quot;service&quot; keyword in a .proto file, but they are different from API Services, which represent a concrete implementation of an interface as opposed to simply a description of methods and bindings. They are also sometimes simply referred to as &quot;APIs&quot; in other contexts, such as the name of this message itself. See https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/glossary for detailed terminology.
       &quot;methods&quot;: [ # The methods of this interface, in unspecified order.
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@
       },
     ],
   },
-  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # This field is obsolete. Its value must be set to `3`.
+  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # Deprecated. The service config compiler always sets this field to `3`.
   &quot;context&quot;: { # `Context` defines which contexts an API requests. Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requested: - google.rpc.context.ProjectContext - google.rpc.context.OriginContext The above specifies that all methods in the API request `google.rpc.context.ProjectContext` and `google.rpc.context.OriginContext`. Available context types are defined in package `google.rpc.context`. This also provides mechanism to allowlist any protobuf message extension that can be sent in grpc metadata using “x-goog-ext--bin” and “x-goog-ext--jspb” format. For example, list any service specific protobuf types that can appear in grpc metadata as follows in your yaml file: Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;google.example.library.v1.LibraryService.CreateBook&quot; allowed_request_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension allowed_response_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension You can also specify extension ID instead of fully qualified extension name here. # Context configuration.
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of RPC context rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
       { # A context rule provides information about the context for an individual API element.
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@
     &quot;summary&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A short summary of what the service does. Can only be provided by plain text.
   },
   &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Configuration for network endpoints. If this is empty, then an endpoint with the same name as the service is automatically generated to service all defined APIs.
-    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint that serves a set of APIs. A service may expose any number of endpoints, and all endpoints share the same service configuration, such as quota configuration and monitoring configuration. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
+    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint of a service that serves a set of APIs. It is commonly known as a service endpoint. A service may expose any number of service endpoints, and all service endpoints share the same service definition, such as quota limits and monitoring metrics. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
       &quot;aliases&quot;: [ # DEPRECATED: This field is no longer supported. Instead of using aliases, please specify multiple google.api.Endpoint for each of the intended aliases. Additional names that this endpoint will be hosted on.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name `custom.googleapis.com` or `external.googleapis.com`. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02KBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523KBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `KBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed.. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02kBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523kBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `kBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
       &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of `metric_kind` and `value_type` might not be supported.
     },
   ],
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;usage&quot;: { # Configuration controlling usage of a service. # Configuration controlling usage of this service.
     &quot;producerNotificationChannel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of a channel used for sending notifications to the service producer. Google Service Management currently only supports [Google Cloud Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub) as a notification channel. To use Google Cloud Pub/Sub as the channel, this must be the name of a Cloud Pub/Sub topic that uses the Cloud Pub/Sub topic name format documented in https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview.
-    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;.
+    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;. For Google APIs, a Terms of Service requirement must be included here. Google Cloud APIs must include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/cloud&quot;. Other Google APIs should include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/universal&quot;. Additional ToS can be included based on the business needs.
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of usage rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
@@ -576,7 +576,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service config_version: 3 name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
+    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
   &quot;apis&quot;: [ # A list of API interfaces exported by this service. Only the `name` field of the google.protobuf.Api needs to be provided by the configuration author, as the remaining fields will be derived from the IDL during the normalization process. It is an error to specify an API interface here which cannot be resolved against the associated IDL files.
     { # Api is a light-weight descriptor for an API Interface. Interfaces are also described as &quot;protocol buffer services&quot; in some contexts, such as by the &quot;service&quot; keyword in a .proto file, but they are different from API Services, which represent a concrete implementation of an interface as opposed to simply a description of methods and bindings. They are also sometimes simply referred to as &quot;APIs&quot; in other contexts, such as the name of this message itself. See https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/glossary for detailed terminology.
       &quot;methods&quot;: [ # The methods of this interface, in unspecified order.
@@ -677,7 +677,7 @@
       },
     ],
   },
-  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # This field is obsolete. Its value must be set to `3`.
+  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # Deprecated. The service config compiler always sets this field to `3`.
   &quot;context&quot;: { # `Context` defines which contexts an API requests. Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requested: - google.rpc.context.ProjectContext - google.rpc.context.OriginContext The above specifies that all methods in the API request `google.rpc.context.ProjectContext` and `google.rpc.context.OriginContext`. Available context types are defined in package `google.rpc.context`. This also provides mechanism to allowlist any protobuf message extension that can be sent in grpc metadata using “x-goog-ext--bin” and “x-goog-ext--jspb” format. For example, list any service specific protobuf types that can appear in grpc metadata as follows in your yaml file: Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;google.example.library.v1.LibraryService.CreateBook&quot; allowed_request_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension allowed_response_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension You can also specify extension ID instead of fully qualified extension name here. # Context configuration.
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of RPC context rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
       { # A context rule provides information about the context for an individual API element.
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@
     &quot;summary&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A short summary of what the service does. Can only be provided by plain text.
   },
   &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Configuration for network endpoints. If this is empty, then an endpoint with the same name as the service is automatically generated to service all defined APIs.
-    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint that serves a set of APIs. A service may expose any number of endpoints, and all endpoints share the same service configuration, such as quota configuration and monitoring configuration. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
+    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint of a service that serves a set of APIs. It is commonly known as a service endpoint. A service may expose any number of service endpoints, and all service endpoints share the same service definition, such as quota limits and monitoring metrics. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
       &quot;aliases&quot;: [ # DEPRECATED: This field is no longer supported. Instead of using aliases, please specify multiple google.api.Endpoint for each of the intended aliases. Additional names that this endpoint will be hosted on.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
@@ -852,7 +852,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name `custom.googleapis.com` or `external.googleapis.com`. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02KBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523KBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `KBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed.. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02kBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523kBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `kBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
       &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of `metric_kind` and `value_type` might not be supported.
     },
   ],
@@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;usage&quot;: { # Configuration controlling usage of a service. # Configuration controlling usage of this service.
     &quot;producerNotificationChannel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of a channel used for sending notifications to the service producer. Google Service Management currently only supports [Google Cloud Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub) as a notification channel. To use Google Cloud Pub/Sub as the channel, this must be the name of a Cloud Pub/Sub topic that uses the Cloud Pub/Sub topic name format documented in https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview.
-    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;.
+    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;. For Google APIs, a Terms of Service requirement must be included here. Google Cloud APIs must include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/cloud&quot;. Other Google APIs should include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/universal&quot;. Additional ToS can be included based on the business needs.
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of usage rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service config_version: 3 name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
+    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
   &quot;apis&quot;: [ # A list of API interfaces exported by this service. Only the `name` field of the google.protobuf.Api needs to be provided by the configuration author, as the remaining fields will be derived from the IDL during the normalization process. It is an error to specify an API interface here which cannot be resolved against the associated IDL files.
     { # Api is a light-weight descriptor for an API Interface. Interfaces are also described as &quot;protocol buffer services&quot; in some contexts, such as by the &quot;service&quot; keyword in a .proto file, but they are different from API Services, which represent a concrete implementation of an interface as opposed to simply a description of methods and bindings. They are also sometimes simply referred to as &quot;APIs&quot; in other contexts, such as the name of this message itself. See https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/glossary for detailed terminology.
       &quot;methods&quot;: [ # The methods of this interface, in unspecified order.
@@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@
       },
     ],
   },
-  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # This field is obsolete. Its value must be set to `3`.
+  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # Deprecated. The service config compiler always sets this field to `3`.
   &quot;context&quot;: { # `Context` defines which contexts an API requests. Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requested: - google.rpc.context.ProjectContext - google.rpc.context.OriginContext The above specifies that all methods in the API request `google.rpc.context.ProjectContext` and `google.rpc.context.OriginContext`. Available context types are defined in package `google.rpc.context`. This also provides mechanism to allowlist any protobuf message extension that can be sent in grpc metadata using “x-goog-ext--bin” and “x-goog-ext--jspb” format. For example, list any service specific protobuf types that can appear in grpc metadata as follows in your yaml file: Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;google.example.library.v1.LibraryService.CreateBook&quot; allowed_request_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension allowed_response_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension You can also specify extension ID instead of fully qualified extension name here. # Context configuration.
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of RPC context rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
       { # A context rule provides information about the context for an individual API element.
@@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@
     &quot;summary&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A short summary of what the service does. Can only be provided by plain text.
   },
   &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Configuration for network endpoints. If this is empty, then an endpoint with the same name as the service is automatically generated to service all defined APIs.
-    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint that serves a set of APIs. A service may expose any number of endpoints, and all endpoints share the same service configuration, such as quota configuration and monitoring configuration. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
+    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint of a service that serves a set of APIs. It is commonly known as a service endpoint. A service may expose any number of service endpoints, and all service endpoints share the same service definition, such as quota limits and monitoring metrics. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
       &quot;aliases&quot;: [ # DEPRECATED: This field is no longer supported. Instead of using aliases, please specify multiple google.api.Endpoint for each of the intended aliases. Additional names that this endpoint will be hosted on.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
@@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name `custom.googleapis.com` or `external.googleapis.com`. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02KBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523KBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `KBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed.. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02kBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523kBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `kBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
       &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of `metric_kind` and `value_type` might not be supported.
     },
   ],
@@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;usage&quot;: { # Configuration controlling usage of a service. # Configuration controlling usage of this service.
     &quot;producerNotificationChannel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of a channel used for sending notifications to the service producer. Google Service Management currently only supports [Google Cloud Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub) as a notification channel. To use Google Cloud Pub/Sub as the channel, this must be the name of a Cloud Pub/Sub topic that uses the Cloud Pub/Sub topic name format documented in https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview.
-    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;.
+    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;. For Google APIs, a Terms of Service requirement must be included here. Google Cloud APIs must include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/cloud&quot;. Other Google APIs should include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/universal&quot;. Additional ToS can be included based on the business needs.
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of usage rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
@@ -1538,7 +1538,7 @@
     { # Response message for ListServiceConfigs method.
   &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The token of the next page of results.
   &quot;serviceConfigs&quot;: [ # The list of service configuration resources.
-    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service config_version: 3 name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
+    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
       &quot;apis&quot;: [ # A list of API interfaces exported by this service. Only the `name` field of the google.protobuf.Api needs to be provided by the configuration author, as the remaining fields will be derived from the IDL during the normalization process. It is an error to specify an API interface here which cannot be resolved against the associated IDL files.
         { # Api is a light-weight descriptor for an API Interface. Interfaces are also described as &quot;protocol buffer services&quot; in some contexts, such as by the &quot;service&quot; keyword in a .proto file, but they are different from API Services, which represent a concrete implementation of an interface as opposed to simply a description of methods and bindings. They are also sometimes simply referred to as &quot;APIs&quot; in other contexts, such as the name of this message itself. See https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/glossary for detailed terminology.
           &quot;methods&quot;: [ # The methods of this interface, in unspecified order.
@@ -1639,7 +1639,7 @@
           },
         ],
       },
-      &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # This field is obsolete. Its value must be set to `3`.
+      &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # Deprecated. The service config compiler always sets this field to `3`.
       &quot;context&quot;: { # `Context` defines which contexts an API requests. Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requested: - google.rpc.context.ProjectContext - google.rpc.context.OriginContext The above specifies that all methods in the API request `google.rpc.context.ProjectContext` and `google.rpc.context.OriginContext`. Available context types are defined in package `google.rpc.context`. This also provides mechanism to allowlist any protobuf message extension that can be sent in grpc metadata using “x-goog-ext--bin” and “x-goog-ext--jspb” format. For example, list any service specific protobuf types that can appear in grpc metadata as follows in your yaml file: Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;google.example.library.v1.LibraryService.CreateBook&quot; allowed_request_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension allowed_response_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension You can also specify extension ID instead of fully qualified extension name here. # Context configuration.
         &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of RPC context rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
           { # A context rule provides information about the context for an individual API element.
@@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@
         &quot;summary&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A short summary of what the service does. Can only be provided by plain text.
       },
       &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Configuration for network endpoints. If this is empty, then an endpoint with the same name as the service is automatically generated to service all defined APIs.
-        { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint that serves a set of APIs. A service may expose any number of endpoints, and all endpoints share the same service configuration, such as quota configuration and monitoring configuration. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
+        { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint of a service that serves a set of APIs. It is commonly known as a service endpoint. A service may expose any number of service endpoints, and all service endpoints share the same service definition, such as quota limits and monitoring metrics. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
           &quot;aliases&quot;: [ # DEPRECATED: This field is no longer supported. Instead of using aliases, please specify multiple google.api.Endpoint for each of the intended aliases. Additional names that this endpoint will be hosted on.
             &quot;A String&quot;,
           ],
@@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@
           ],
           &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name `custom.googleapis.com` or `external.googleapis.com`. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02KBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523KBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `KBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed.. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02kBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523kBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `kBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
           &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of `metric_kind` and `value_type` might not be supported.
         },
       ],
@@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;usage&quot;: { # Configuration controlling usage of a service. # Configuration controlling usage of this service.
         &quot;producerNotificationChannel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of a channel used for sending notifications to the service producer. Google Service Management currently only supports [Google Cloud Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub) as a notification channel. To use Google Cloud Pub/Sub as the channel, this must be the name of a Cloud Pub/Sub topic that uses the Cloud Pub/Sub topic name format documented in https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview.
-        &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;.
+        &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;. For Google APIs, a Terms of Service requirement must be included here. Google Cloud APIs must include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/cloud&quot;. Other Google APIs should include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/universal&quot;. Additional ToS can be included based on the business needs.
           &quot;A String&quot;,
         ],
         &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of usage rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.html
index 48226a2..73b777f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.html
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service config_version: 3 name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
+    { # `Service` is the root object of Google service configuration schema. It describes basic information about a service, such as the name and the title, and delegates other aspects to sub-sections. Each sub-section is either a proto message or a repeated proto message that configures a specific aspect, such as auth. See each proto message definition for details. Example: type: google.api.Service name: calendar.googleapis.com title: Google Calendar API apis: - name: google.calendar.v3.Calendar authentication: providers: - id: google_calendar_auth jwks_uri: https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v1/certs issuer: https://securetoken.google.com rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requirements: provider_id: google_calendar_auth
   &quot;apis&quot;: [ # A list of API interfaces exported by this service. Only the `name` field of the google.protobuf.Api needs to be provided by the configuration author, as the remaining fields will be derived from the IDL during the normalization process. It is an error to specify an API interface here which cannot be resolved against the associated IDL files.
     { # Api is a light-weight descriptor for an API Interface. Interfaces are also described as &quot;protocol buffer services&quot; in some contexts, such as by the &quot;service&quot; keyword in a .proto file, but they are different from API Services, which represent a concrete implementation of an interface as opposed to simply a description of methods and bindings. They are also sometimes simply referred to as &quot;APIs&quot; in other contexts, such as the name of this message itself. See https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/glossary for detailed terminology.
       &quot;methods&quot;: [ # The methods of this interface, in unspecified order.
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@
       },
     ],
   },
-  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # This field is obsolete. Its value must be set to `3`.
+  &quot;configVersion&quot;: 42, # Deprecated. The service config compiler always sets this field to `3`.
   &quot;context&quot;: { # `Context` defines which contexts an API requests. Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;*&quot; requested: - google.rpc.context.ProjectContext - google.rpc.context.OriginContext The above specifies that all methods in the API request `google.rpc.context.ProjectContext` and `google.rpc.context.OriginContext`. Available context types are defined in package `google.rpc.context`. This also provides mechanism to allowlist any protobuf message extension that can be sent in grpc metadata using “x-goog-ext--bin” and “x-goog-ext--jspb” format. For example, list any service specific protobuf types that can appear in grpc metadata as follows in your yaml file: Example: context: rules: - selector: &quot;google.example.library.v1.LibraryService.CreateBook&quot; allowed_request_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension allowed_response_extensions: - google.foo.v1.NewExtension You can also specify extension ID instead of fully qualified extension name here. # Context configuration.
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of RPC context rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
       { # A context rule provides information about the context for an individual API element.
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@
     &quot;summary&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A short summary of what the service does. Can only be provided by plain text.
   },
   &quot;endpoints&quot;: [ # Configuration for network endpoints. If this is empty, then an endpoint with the same name as the service is automatically generated to service all defined APIs.
-    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint that serves a set of APIs. A service may expose any number of endpoints, and all endpoints share the same service configuration, such as quota configuration and monitoring configuration. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
+    { # `Endpoint` describes a network endpoint of a service that serves a set of APIs. It is commonly known as a service endpoint. A service may expose any number of service endpoints, and all service endpoints share the same service definition, such as quota limits and monitoring metrics. Example service configuration: name: library-example.googleapis.com endpoints: # Below entry makes &#x27;google.example.library.v1.Library&#x27; # API be served from endpoint address library-example.googleapis.com. # It also allows HTTP OPTIONS calls to be passed to the backend, for # it to decide whether the subsequent cross-origin request is # allowed to proceed. - name: library-example.googleapis.com allow_cors: true
       &quot;aliases&quot;: [ # DEPRECATED: This field is no longer supported. Instead of using aliases, please specify multiple google.api.Endpoint for each of the intended aliases. Additional names that this endpoint will be hosted on.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the metric descriptor.
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The metric type, including its DNS name prefix. The type is not URL-encoded. All user-defined metric types have the DNS name `custom.googleapis.com` or `external.googleapis.com`. Metric types should use a natural hierarchical grouping. For example: &quot;custom.googleapis.com/invoice/paid/amount&quot; &quot;external.googleapis.com/prometheus/up&quot; &quot;appengine.googleapis.com/http/server/response_latencies&quot;
-      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems may scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02KBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523KBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `KBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it may be displayed.. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](http://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
+      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units in which the metric value is reported. It is only applicable if the `value_type` is `INT64`, `DOUBLE`, or `DISTRIBUTION`. The `unit` defines the representation of the stored metric values. Different systems might scale the values to be more easily displayed (so a value of `0.02kBy` _might_ be displayed as `20By`, and a value of `3523kBy` _might_ be displayed as `3.5MBy`). However, if the `unit` is `kBy`, then the value of the metric is always in thousands of bytes, no matter how it might be displayed. If you want a custom metric to record the exact number of CPU-seconds used by a job, you can create an `INT64 CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `s{CPU}` (or equivalently `1s{CPU}` or just `s`). If the job uses 12,005 CPU-seconds, then the value is written as `12005`. Alternatively, if you want a custom metric to record data in a more granular way, you can create a `DOUBLE CUMULATIVE` metric whose `unit` is `ks{CPU}`, and then write the value `12.005` (which is `12005/1000`), or use `Kis{CPU}` and write `11.723` (which is `12005/1024`). The supported units are a subset of [The Unified Code for Units of Measure](https://unitsofmeasure.org/ucum.html) standard: **Basic units (UNIT)** * `bit` bit * `By` byte * `s` second * `min` minute * `h` hour * `d` day * `1` dimensionless **Prefixes (PREFIX)** * `k` kilo (10^3) * `M` mega (10^6) * `G` giga (10^9) * `T` tera (10^12) * `P` peta (10^15) * `E` exa (10^18) * `Z` zetta (10^21) * `Y` yotta (10^24) * `m` milli (10^-3) * `u` micro (10^-6) * `n` nano (10^-9) * `p` pico (10^-12) * `f` femto (10^-15) * `a` atto (10^-18) * `z` zepto (10^-21) * `y` yocto (10^-24) * `Ki` kibi (2^10) * `Mi` mebi (2^20) * `Gi` gibi (2^30) * `Ti` tebi (2^40) * `Pi` pebi (2^50) **Grammar** The grammar also includes these connectors: * `/` division or ratio (as an infix operator). For examples, `kBy/{email}` or `MiBy/10ms` (although you should almost never have `/s` in a metric `unit`; rates should always be computed at query time from the underlying cumulative or delta value). * `.` multiplication or composition (as an infix operator). For examples, `GBy.d` or `k{watt}.h`. The grammar for a unit is as follows: Expression = Component { &quot;.&quot; Component } { &quot;/&quot; Component } ; Component = ( [ PREFIX ] UNIT | &quot;%&quot; ) [ Annotation ] | Annotation | &quot;1&quot; ; Annotation = &quot;{&quot; NAME &quot;}&quot; ; Notes: * `Annotation` is just a comment if it follows a `UNIT`. If the annotation is used alone, then the unit is equivalent to `1`. For examples, `{request}/s == 1/s`, `By{transmitted}/s == By/s`. * `NAME` is a sequence of non-blank printable ASCII characters not containing `{` or `}`. * `1` represents a unitary [dimensionless unit](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimensionless_quantity) of 1, such as in `1/s`. It is typically used when none of the basic units are appropriate. For example, &quot;new users per day&quot; can be represented as `1/d` or `{new-users}/d` (and a metric value `5` would mean &quot;5 new users). Alternatively, &quot;thousands of page views per day&quot; would be represented as `1000/d` or `k1/d` or `k{page_views}/d` (and a metric value of `5.3` would mean &quot;5300 page views per day&quot;). * `%` represents dimensionless value of 1/100, and annotates values giving a percentage (so the metric values are typically in the range of 0..100, and a metric value `3` means &quot;3 percent&quot;). * `10^2.%` indicates a metric contains a ratio, typically in the range 0..1, that will be multiplied by 100 and displayed as a percentage (so a metric value `0.03` means &quot;3 percent&quot;).
       &quot;valueType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Whether the measurement is an integer, a floating-point number, etc. Some combinations of `metric_kind` and `value_type` might not be supported.
     },
   ],
@@ -795,7 +795,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;usage&quot;: { # Configuration controlling usage of a service. # Configuration controlling usage of this service.
     &quot;producerNotificationChannel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of a channel used for sending notifications to the service producer. Google Service Management currently only supports [Google Cloud Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub) as a notification channel. To use Google Cloud Pub/Sub as the channel, this must be the name of a Cloud Pub/Sub topic that uses the Cloud Pub/Sub topic name format documented in https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview.
-    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;.
+    &quot;requirements&quot;: [ # Requirements that must be satisfied before a consumer project can use the service. Each requirement is of the form /; for example &#x27;serviceusage.googleapis.com/billing-enabled&#x27;. For Google APIs, a Terms of Service requirement must be included here. Google Cloud APIs must include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/cloud&quot;. Other Google APIs should include &quot;serviceusage.googleapis.com/tos/universal&quot;. Additional ToS can be included based on the business needs.
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
     &quot;rules&quot;: [ # A list of usage rules that apply to individual API methods. **NOTE:** All service configuration rules follow &quot;last one wins&quot; order.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/smartdevicemanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html b/docs/dyn/smartdevicemanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html
index 084f31f..997108c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/smartdevicemanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/smartdevicemanagement_v1.enterprises.devices.html
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@
     { # Device resource represents an instance of enterprise managed device in the property.
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The resource name of the device. For example: &quot;enterprises/XYZ/devices/123&quot;.
   &quot;parentRelations&quot;: [ # Assignee details of the device.
-    { # Represents device relationships, for instance, structure/room to which the device is assigned to. For now this is only filled in the enterprise flow.
+    { # Represents device relationships, for instance, structure/room to which the device is assigned to.
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The custom name of the relation -- e.g., structure/room where the device is assigned to.
       &quot;parent&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The name of the relation -- e.g., structure/room where the device is assigned to. For example: &quot;enterprises/XYZ/structures/ABC&quot; or &quot;enterprises/XYZ/structures/ABC/rooms/123&quot;
     },
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@
     { # Device resource represents an instance of enterprise managed device in the property.
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The resource name of the device. For example: &quot;enterprises/XYZ/devices/123&quot;.
       &quot;parentRelations&quot;: [ # Assignee details of the device.
-        { # Represents device relationships, for instance, structure/room to which the device is assigned to. For now this is only filled in the enterprise flow.
+        { # Represents device relationships, for instance, structure/room to which the device is assigned to.
           &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The custom name of the relation -- e.g., structure/room where the device is assigned to.
           &quot;parent&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The name of the relation -- e.g., structure/room where the device is assigned to. For example: &quot;enterprises/XYZ/structures/ABC&quot; or &quot;enterprises/XYZ/structures/ABC/rooms/123&quot;
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photo.html b/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photo.html
index 5d64df8..9cc72ae 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photo.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photo.html
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Gets the metadata of the specified Photo. This method returns the following error codes: * google.rpc.Code.PERMISSION_DENIED if the requesting user did not create the requested Photo. * google.rpc.Code.NOT_FOUND if the requested Photo does not exist. * google.rpc.Code.UNAVAILABLE if the requested Photo is still being indexed.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#startUpload">startUpload(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates an upload session to start uploading photo bytes. The method uses the upload URL of the returned UploadRef to upload the bytes for the Photo. In addition to the photo requirements shown in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?hl=en&ref_topic=6275604, the photo must meet the following requirements: * Photo Sphere XMP metadata must be included in the photo metadata. See https://developers.google.com/streetview/spherical-metadata for the required fields. * The pixel size of the photo must meet the size requirements listed in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?hl=en&ref_topic=6275604, and the photo must be a full 360 horizontally. After the upload completes, the method uses UploadRef with CreatePhoto to create the Photo object entry.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an upload session to start uploading photo bytes. The method uses the upload URL of the returned UploadRef to upload the bytes for the Photo. In addition to the photo requirements shown in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?ref_topic=6275604, the photo must meet the following requirements: * Photo Sphere XMP metadata must be included in the photo metadata. See https://developers.google.com/streetview/spherical-metadata for the required fields. * The pixel size of the photo must meet the size requirements listed in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?ref_topic=6275604, and the photo must be a full 360 horizontally. After the upload completes, the method uses UploadRef with CreatePhoto to create the Photo object entry.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#update">update(id, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Updates the metadata of a Photo, such as pose, place association, connections, etc. Changing the pixels of a photo is not supported. Only the fields specified in the updateMask field are used. If `updateMask` is not present, the update applies to all fields. This method returns the following error codes: * google.rpc.Code.PERMISSION_DENIED if the requesting user did not create the requested photo. * google.rpc.Code.INVALID_ARGUMENT if the request is malformed. * google.rpc.Code.NOT_FOUND if the requested photo does not exist. * google.rpc.Code.UNAVAILABLE if the requested Photo is still being indexed.</p>
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@
   &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
   &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
   &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
   },
   &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
 }
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@
   &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
   &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
   &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
   },
   &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
 }</pre>
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@
   &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
   &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
   &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
   },
   &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
 }</pre>
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="startUpload">startUpload(body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates an upload session to start uploading photo bytes. The method uses the upload URL of the returned UploadRef to upload the bytes for the Photo. In addition to the photo requirements shown in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?hl=en&amp;ref_topic=6275604, the photo must meet the following requirements: * Photo Sphere XMP metadata must be included in the photo metadata. See https://developers.google.com/streetview/spherical-metadata for the required fields. * The pixel size of the photo must meet the size requirements listed in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?hl=en&amp;ref_topic=6275604, and the photo must be a full 360 horizontally. After the upload completes, the method uses UploadRef with CreatePhoto to create the Photo object entry.
+  <pre>Creates an upload session to start uploading photo bytes. The method uses the upload URL of the returned UploadRef to upload the bytes for the Photo. In addition to the photo requirements shown in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?ref_topic=6275604, the photo must meet the following requirements: * Photo Sphere XMP metadata must be included in the photo metadata. See https://developers.google.com/streetview/spherical-metadata for the required fields. * The pixel size of the photo must meet the size requirements listed in https://support.google.com/maps/answer/7012050?ref_topic=6275604, and the photo must be a full 360 horizontally. After the upload completes, the method uses UploadRef with CreatePhoto to create the Photo object entry.
 
 Args:
   body: object, The request body.
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # Upload reference for media files.
-  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+  &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -361,7 +361,7 @@
   &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
   &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
   &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
   },
   &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
 }
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@
   &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
   &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
   &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+    &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
   },
   &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
 }</pre>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photos.html b/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photos.html
index 8b25b89..3ef8b07 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photos.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/streetviewpublish_v1.photos.html
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@
         &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
         &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
         &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
         },
         &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
       },
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@
         &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
         &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
         &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
         },
         &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
       },
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@
         &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
         &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
         &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+          &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
         },
         &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
       },
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@
       &quot;thumbnailUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The thumbnail URL for showing a preview of the given photo.
       &quot;transferStatus&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Status of rights transfer on this photo.
       &quot;uploadReference&quot;: { # Upload reference for media files. # Required when creating a photo. Input only. The resource URL where the photo bytes are uploaded to.
-        &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
+        &quot;uploadUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An upload reference should be unique for each user. It follows the form: &quot;https://streetviewpublish.googleapis.com/media/user/{account_id}/photo/{upload_reference}&quot;
       },
       &quot;viewCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. View count of the photo.
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/tasks_v1.tasks.html b/docs/dyn/tasks_v1.tasks.html
index 18530ae..3fc3ea4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/tasks_v1.tasks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/tasks_v1.tasks.html
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # LINT.IfChange
+{
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@
     {
   &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ETag of the resource.
   &quot;items&quot;: [ # Collection of tasks.
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
       &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
       &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
       &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # LINT.IfChange
+{
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # LINT.IfChange
+{
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@
 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # LINT.IfChange
+    {
   &quot;completed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Completion date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). This field is omitted if the task has not been completed.
   &quot;deleted&quot;: True or False, # Flag indicating whether the task has been deleted. The default is False.
   &quot;due&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Due date of the task (as a RFC 3339 timestamp). Optional. The due date only records date information; the time portion of the timestamp is discarded when setting the due date. It isn&#x27;t possible to read or write the time that a task is due via the API.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.voices.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.voices.html
index 3a99ad0..043c6c9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.voices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1.voices.html
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@
   <pre>Returns a list of Voice supported for synthesis.
 
 Args:
-  languageCode: string, Optional. Recommended. [BCP-47](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt) language tag. If specified, the ListVoices call will only return voices that can be used to synthesize this language_code. E.g. when specifying &quot;en-NZ&quot;, you will get supported &quot;en-\*&quot; voices; when specifying &quot;no&quot;, you will get supported &quot;no-\*&quot; (Norwegian) and &quot;nb-\*&quot; (Norwegian Bokmal) voices; specifying &quot;zh&quot; will also get supported &quot;cmn-\*&quot; voices; specifying &quot;zh-hk&quot; will also get supported &quot;yue-\*&quot; voices.
+  languageCode: string, Optional. Recommended. [BCP-47](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt) language tag. If not specified, the API will return all supported voices. If specified, the ListVoices call will only return voices that can be used to synthesize this language_code. E.g. when specifying &quot;en-NZ&quot;, you will get supported &quot;en-NZ&quot; voices; when specifying &quot;no&quot;, you will get supported &quot;no-\*&quot; (Norwegian) and &quot;nb-\*&quot; (Norwegian Bokmal) voices; specifying &quot;zh&quot; will also get supported &quot;cmn-\*&quot; voices; specifying &quot;zh-hk&quot; will also get supported &quot;yue-hk&quot; voices.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.voices.html b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.voices.html
index 66e4dc7..bf21565 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.voices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/texttospeech_v1beta1.voices.html
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@
   <pre>Returns a list of Voice supported for synthesis.
 
 Args:
-  languageCode: string, Optional. Recommended. [BCP-47](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt) language tag. If specified, the ListVoices call will only return voices that can be used to synthesize this language_code. E.g. when specifying &quot;en-NZ&quot;, you will get supported &quot;en-\*&quot; voices; when specifying &quot;no&quot;, you will get supported &quot;no-\*&quot; (Norwegian) and &quot;nb-\*&quot; (Norwegian Bokmal) voices; specifying &quot;zh&quot; will also get supported &quot;cmn-\*&quot; voices; specifying &quot;zh-hk&quot; will also get supported &quot;yue-\*&quot; voices.
+  languageCode: string, Optional. Recommended. [BCP-47](https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt) language tag. If not specified, the API will return all supported voices. If specified, the ListVoices call will only return voices that can be used to synthesize this language_code. E.g. when specifying &quot;en-NZ&quot;, you will get supported &quot;en-NZ&quot; voices; when specifying &quot;no&quot;, you will get supported &quot;no-\*&quot; (Norwegian) and &quot;nb-\*&quot; (Norwegian Bokmal) voices; specifying &quot;zh&quot; will also get supported &quot;cmn-\*&quot; voices; specifying &quot;zh-hk&quot; will also get supported &quot;yue-hk&quot; voices.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.html
index a9b1a3a..50e7107 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.html
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
       &quot;ignoreCase&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates match is case-insensitive. Default value is false if missing.
     },
   },
-  &quot;inputConfigs&quot;: [ # Required. Input configurations. The total number of files matched should be &lt;= 1000. The total content size should be &lt;= 100M Unicode codepoints. The files must use UTF-8 encoding.
+  &quot;inputConfigs&quot;: [ # Required. Input configurations. The total number of files matched should be &lt;= 100. The total content size should be &lt;= 100M Unicode codepoints. The files must use UTF-8 encoding.
     { # Input configuration for BatchTranslateText request.
       &quot;gcsSource&quot;: { # The Google Cloud Storage location for the input content. # Required. Google Cloud Storage location for the source input. This can be a single file (for example, `gs://translation-test/input.tsv`) or a wildcard (for example, `gs://translation-test/*`). If a file extension is `.tsv`, it can contain either one or two columns. The first column (optional) is the id of the text request. If the first column is missing, we use the row number (0-based) from the input file as the ID in the output file. The second column is the actual text to be translated. We recommend each row be &lt;= 10K Unicode codepoints, otherwise an error might be returned. Note that the input tsv must be RFC 4180 compliant. You could use https://github.com/Clever/csvlint to check potential formatting errors in your tsv file. csvlint --delimiter=&#x27;\t&#x27; your_input_file.tsv The other supported file extensions are `.txt` or `.html`, which is treated as a single large chunk of text.
         &quot;inputUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Source data URI. For example, `gs://my_bucket/my_object`.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.operations.html b/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.operations.html
index bf33bcc..b4d90ec 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/translate_v3.projects.locations.operations.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#wait">wait(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Waits for the specified long-running operation until it is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="cancel">cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="wait">wait(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Waits for the specified long-running operation until it is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
+  <pre>Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the operation resource to wait on. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.html
index 1bd3419..6ebca81 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.html
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
       &quot;ignoreCase&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Indicates match is case-insensitive. Default value is false if missing.
     },
   },
-  &quot;inputConfigs&quot;: [ # Required. Input configurations. The total number of files matched should be &lt;= 1000. The total content size should be &lt;= 100M Unicode codepoints. The files must use UTF-8 encoding.
+  &quot;inputConfigs&quot;: [ # Required. Input configurations. The total number of files matched should be &lt;= 100. The total content size should be &lt;= 100M Unicode codepoints. The files must use UTF-8 encoding.
     { # Input configuration for BatchTranslateText request.
       &quot;gcsSource&quot;: { # The Google Cloud Storage location for the input content. # Required. Google Cloud Storage location for the source input. This can be a single file (for example, `gs://translation-test/input.tsv`) or a wildcard (for example, `gs://translation-test/*`). If a file extension is `.tsv`, it can contain either one or two columns. The first column (optional) is the id of the text request. If the first column is missing, we use the row number (0-based) from the input file as the ID in the output file. The second column is the actual text to be translated. We recommend each row be &lt;= 10K Unicode codepoints, otherwise an error might be returned. Note that the input tsv must be RFC 4180 compliant. You could use https://github.com/Clever/csvlint to check potential formatting errors in your tsv file. csvlint --delimiter=&#x27;\t&#x27; your_input_file.tsv The other supported file extensions are `.txt` or `.html`, which is treated as a single large chunk of text.
         &quot;inputUri&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Source data URI. For example, `gs://my_bucket/my_object`.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.operations.html b/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.operations.html
index b7b3ce9..3dce875 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/translate_v3beta1.projects.locations.operations.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#wait">wait(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Waits for the specified long-running operation until it is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="cancel">cancel(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="wait">wait(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Waits for the specified long-running operation until it is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
+  <pre>Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the operation resource to wait on. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..16c191c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="workflows_v1.html">Workflows API</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="workflows_v1.projects.html">projects()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the projects Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</code>
+  <pre>Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+
+        Args:
+          callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
+            form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
+            request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
+            third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
+            error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
+            occurred.
+
+        Returns:
+          A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+        </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23de525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.html
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="workflows_v1.html">Workflows API</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.html">projects</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.html">locations()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the locations Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8fef85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="workflows_v1.html">Workflows API</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.operations.html">operations()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the operations Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.workflows.html">workflows()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the workflows Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets information about a location.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists information about the supported locations for this service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets information about a location.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Resource name for the location. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A resource that represents Google Cloud Platform location.
+  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, &quot;Tokyo&quot;.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {&quot;cloud.googleapis.com/region&quot;: &quot;us-east1&quot;}
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;locationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The canonical id for this location. For example: `&quot;us-east1&quot;`.
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `&quot;projects/example-project/locations/us-east1&quot;`
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists information about the supported locations for this service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required)
+  filter: string, The standard list filter.
+  pageSize: integer, The standard list page size.
+  pageToken: string, The standard list page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Locations.ListLocations.
+  &quot;locations&quot;: [ # A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # A resource that represents Google Cloud Platform location.
+      &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, &quot;Tokyo&quot;.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {&quot;cloud.googleapis.com/region&quot;: &quot;us-east1&quot;}
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;locationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The canonical id for this location. For example: `&quot;us-east1&quot;`.
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `&quot;projects/example-project/locations/us-east1&quot;`
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The standard List next-page token.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.operations.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.operations.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c1883b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.operations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="workflows_v1.html">Workflows API</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.operations.html">operations</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`. NOTE: the `name` binding allows API services to override the binding to use different resource name schemes, such as `users/*/operations`. To override the binding, API services can add a binding such as `"/v1/{name=users/*}/operations"` to their service configuration. For backwards compatibility, the default name includes the operations collection id, however overriding users must ensure the name binding is the parent resource, without the operations collection id.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn&#x27;t support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to be deleted. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn&#x27;t support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`. NOTE: the `name` binding allows API services to override the binding to use different resource name schemes, such as `users/*/operations`. To override the binding, API services can add a binding such as `&quot;/v1/{name=users/*}/operations&quot;` to their service configuration. For backwards compatibility, the default name includes the operations collection id, however overriding users must ensure the name binding is the parent resource, without the operations collection id.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation&#x27;s parent resource. (required)
+  filter: string, The standard list filter.
+  pageSize: integer, The standard list page size.
+  pageToken: string, The standard list page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Operations.ListOperations.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The standard List next-page token.
+  &quot;operations&quot;: [ # A list of operations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+      &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+      &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+        &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+        &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
+        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+      },
+      &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+      &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.workflows.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.workflows.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eddca51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1.projects.locations.workflows.html
@@ -0,0 +1,333 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="workflows_v1.html">Workflows API</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.html">projects</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.html">locations</a> . <a href="workflows_v1.projects.locations.workflows.html">workflows</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, workflowId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new workflow. If a workflow with the specified name already exists in the specified project and location, the long running operation will return ALREADY_EXISTS error.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes a workflow with the specified name. This method also cancels and deletes all running executions of the workflow.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets details of a single Workflow.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists Workflows in a given project and location. The default order is not specified.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates an existing workflow. Running this method has no impact on already running executions of the workflow. A new revision of the workflow may be created as a result of a successful update operation. In that case, such revision will be used in new workflow executions.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, workflowId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates a new workflow. If a workflow with the specified name already exists in the specified project and location, the long running operation will return ALREADY_EXISTS error.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Project and location in which the workflow should be created. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Workflow program to be executed by Workflows.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp of when the workflow was created.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Description of the workflow provided by the user. Must be at most 1000 unicode characters long.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels associated with this workflow. Labels can contain at most 64 entries. Keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters and can only contain lowercase letters, numeric characters, underscores and dashes. Label keys must start with a letter. International characters are allowed.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
+  &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
+  &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the workflow.
+}
+
+  workflowId: string, Required. The ID of the workflow to be created. It has to fulfill the following requirements: * Must contain only letters, numbers, underscores and hyphens. * Must start with a letter. * Must be between 1-64 characters. * Must end with a number or a letter. * Must be unique within the customer project and location.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes a workflow with the specified name. This method also cancels and deletes all running executions of the workflow.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the workflow to be deleted. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets details of a single Workflow.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the workflow which information should be retrieved. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Workflow program to be executed by Workflows.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp of when the workflow was created.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Description of the workflow provided by the user. Must be at most 1000 unicode characters long.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels associated with this workflow. Labels can contain at most 64 entries. Keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters and can only contain lowercase letters, numeric characters, underscores and dashes. Label keys must start with a letter. International characters are allowed.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
+  &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
+  &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the workflow.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists Workflows in a given project and location. The default order is not specified.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Project and location from which the workflows should be listed. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location} (required)
+  filter: string, Filter to restrict results to specific workflows.
+  orderBy: string, Comma-separated list of fields that that specify the order of the results. Default sorting order for a field is ascending. To specify descending order for a field, append a &quot; desc&quot; suffix. If not specified, the results will be returned in an unspecified order.
+  pageSize: integer, Maximum number of workflows to return per call. The service may return fewer than this value. If the value is not specified, a default value of 500 will be used. The maximum permitted value is 1000 and values greater than 1000 will be coerced down to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, A page token, received from a previous `ListWorkflows` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListWorkflows` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for the ListWorkflows method.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+  &quot;unreachable&quot;: [ # Unreachable resources.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+  &quot;workflows&quot;: [ # The workflows which match the request.
+    { # Workflow program to be executed by Workflows.
+      &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp of when the workflow was created.
+      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Description of the workflow provided by the user. Must be at most 1000 unicode characters long.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels associated with this workflow. Labels can contain at most 64 entries. Keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters and can only contain lowercase letters, numeric characters, underscores and dashes. Label keys must start with a letter. International characters are allowed.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
+      &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
+      &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+      &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
+      &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
+      &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
+      &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the workflow.
+    },
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Updates an existing workflow. Running this method has no impact on already running executions of the workflow. A new revision of the workflow may be created as a result of a successful update operation. In that case, such revision will be used in new workflow executions.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow} (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Workflow program to be executed by Workflows.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp of when the workflow was created.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Description of the workflow provided by the user. Must be at most 1000 unicode characters long.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels associated with this workflow. Labels can contain at most 64 entries. Keys and values can be no longer than 63 characters and can only contain lowercase letters, numeric characters, underscores and dashes. Label keys must start with a letter. International characters are allowed.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
+  &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
+  &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The last update timestamp of the workflow.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, List of fields to be updated. If not present, the entire workflow will be updated.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1beta.projects.locations.workflows.html b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1beta.projects.locations.workflows.html
index 19cd96f..23356eb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/workflows_v1beta.projects.locations.workflows.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/workflows_v1beta.projects.locations.workflows.html
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
   &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
-  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following fields of a workflow: - `source_code` - `service_account` The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
   &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
   &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
   &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
-  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following fields of a workflow: - `source_code` - `service_account` The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
   &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
   &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
       &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
-      &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following fields of a workflow: - `source_code` - `service_account` The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+      &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
       &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
       &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
       &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The resource name of the workflow. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/workflows/{workflow}
   &quot;revisionCreateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The timestamp that the latest revision of the workflow was created.
-  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following fields of a workflow: - `source_code` - `service_account` The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
+  &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The revision of the workflow. A new revision of a workflow is created as a result of updating the following properties of a workflow: - Service account - Workflow code to be executed The format is &quot;000001-a4d&quot;, where the first 6 characters define the zero-padded revision ordinal number. They are followed by a hyphen and 3 hexadecimal random characters.
   &quot;serviceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the service account associated with the latest workflow version. This service account represents the identity of the workflow and determines what permissions the workflow has. Format: projects/{project}/serviceAccounts/{account} Using `-` as a wildcard for the `{project}` will infer the project from the account. The `{account}` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. If not provided, workflow will use the project&#x27;s default service account. Modifying this field for an existing workflow results in a new workflow revision.
   &quot;sourceContents&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Workflow code to be executed. The size limit is 32KB.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the workflow deployment.